INSTALLATION AND
OPERATION MANUAL
ASMi-54L
SHDSL.bis Modem
Version 2.8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
SHDSL.bis Modem
Version 2.8
Installation and Operation Manual
Notice
This manual contains information that is proprietary to RAD Data Communications Ltd. ("RAD").
No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever without prior written
approval by RAD Data Communications.
Right, title and interest, all information, copyrights, patents, know-how, trade secrets and other
intellectual property or other proprietary rights relating to this manual and to the ASMi-54L and
any software components contained therein are proprietary products of RAD protected under
international copyright law and shall be and remain solely with RAD.
The ASMi-54L product name is owned by RAD. No right, license, or interest to such trademark is
granted hereunder, and you agree that no such right, license, or interest shall be asserted by
you with respect to such trademark. The RAD name, logo, logotype, and the terms EtherAccess,
TDMoIP and TDMoIP Driven, and the product names Optimux and IPmux, are registered
trademarks of RAD Data Communications Ltd. All other trademarks are the property of their
respective holders.
You shall not copy, reverse compile or reverse assemble all or any portion of the Manual or the
ASMi-54L. You are prohibited from, and shall not, directly or indirectly, develop, market,
distribute, license, or sell any product that supports substantially similar functionality as the
ASMi-54L, based on or derived in any way from the ASMi-54L. Your undertaking in this paragraph
shall survive the termination of this Agreement.
This Agreement is effective upon your opening of the ASMi-54L package and shall continue until
terminated. RAD may terminate this Agreement upon the breach by you of any term hereof.
Upon such termination by RAD, you agree to return to RAD the ASMi-54L and all copies and
portions thereof.
For further information contact RAD at the address below or contact your local distributor.
International Headquarters
RAD Data Communications Ltd.
North America Headquarters
RAD Data Communications Inc.
24 Raoul Wallenberg Street
Tel Aviv 69719, Israel
Tel: 972-3-6458181
Fax: 972-3-6498250, 6474436
E-mail: market@rad.com
900 Corporate Drive
Mahwah, NJ 07430, USA
Tel: (201) 5291100, Toll free: 1-800-4447234
Fax: (201) 5295777
E-mail: market@radusa.com
© 1988–2015 RAD Data Communications Ltd.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Publication No. 503-210-""/15
Front Matter
Installation and Operation Manual
Limited Warranty
RAD warrants to DISTRIBUTOR that the hardware in the ASMi-54L to be delivered hereunder shall
be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of
twelve (12) months following the date of shipment to DISTRIBUTOR.
If, during the warranty period, any component part of the equipment becomes defective by
reason of material or workmanship, and DISTRIBUTOR immediately notifies RAD of such defect,
RAD shall have the option to choose the appropriate corrective action: a) supply a replacement
part, or b) request return of equipment to its plant for repair, or c) perform necessary repair at
the equipment's location. In the event that RAD requests the return of equipment, each party
shall pay one-way shipping costs.
RAD shall be released from all obligations under its warranty in the event that the equipment has
been subjected to misuse, neglect, accident or improper installation, or if repairs or
modifications were made by persons other than RAD's own authorized service personnel, unless
such repairs by others were made with the written consent of RAD.
The above warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied. There are no
warranties which extend beyond the face hereof, including, but not limited to, warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, and in no event shall RAD be liable for
consequential damages.
RAD shall not be liable to any person for any special or indirect damages, including, but not
limited to, lost profits from any cause whatsoever arising from or in any way connected with the
manufacture, sale, handling, repair, maintenance or use of the ASMi-54L, and in no event shall
RAD's liability exceed the purchase price of the ASMi-54L.
DISTRIBUTOR shall be responsible to its customers for any and all warranties which it makes
relating to ASMi-54L and for ensuring that replacements and other adjustments required in
connection with the said warranties are satisfactory.
Software components in the ASMi-54L are provided "as is" and without warranty of any kind.
RAD disclaims all warranties including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose. RAD shall not be liable for any loss of use, interruption of business or
indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages of any kind. In spite of the above RAD
shall do its best to provide error-free software products and shall offer free Software updates
during the warranty period under this Agreement.
RAD's cumulative liability to you or any other party for any loss or damages resulting from any
claims, demands, or actions arising out of or relating to this Agreement and the ASMi-54L shall
not exceed the sum paid to RAD for the purchase of the ASMi-54L. In no event shall RAD be
liable for any indirect, incidental, consequential, special, or exemplary damages or lost profits,
even if RAD has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
This Agreement shall be construed and governed in accordance with the laws of the State of
Israel.
Product Disposal
To facilitate the reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery of waste
equipment in protecting the environment, the owner of this RAD product is
required to refrain from disposing of this product as unsorted municipal waste at
the end of its life cycle. Upon termination of the unit’s use, customers should
provide for its collection for reuse, recycling or other form of environmentally
conscientious disposal.
ii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Front Matter
General Safety Instructions
The following instructions serve as a general guide for the safe installation and operation of
telecommunications products. Additional instructions, if applicable, are included inside the
manual.
Safety Symbols
Warning
This symbol may appear on the equipment or in the text. It indicates
potential safety hazards regarding product operation or maintenance to
operator or service personnel.
Danger of electric shock! Avoid any contact with the marked surface while
the product is energized or connected to outdoor telecommunication lines.
Protective ground: the marked lug or terminal should be connected to the
building protective ground bus.
Warning
Some products may be equipped with a laser diode. In such cases, a label
with the laser class and other warnings as applicable will be attached near
the optical transmitter. The laser warning symbol may be also attached.
Please observe the following precautions:
•
Before turning on the equipment, make sure that the fiber optic cable is
intact and is connected to the transmitter.
•
Do not attempt to adjust the laser drive current.
•
Do not use broken or unterminated fiber-optic cables/connectors or look
straight at the laser beam.
•
The use of optical devices with the equipment will increase eye hazard.
•
Use of controls, adjustments or performing procedures other than those
specified herein, may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
ATTENTION: The laser beam may be invisible!
In some cases, the users may insert their own SFP laser transceivers into the product. Users are
alerted that RAD cannot be held responsible for any damage that may result if non-compliant
transceivers are used. In particular, users are warned to use only agency approved products that
comply with the local laser safety regulations for Class 1 laser products.
Always observe standard safety precautions during installation, operation and maintenance of
this product. Only qualified and authorized service personnel should carry out adjustment,
maintenance or repairs to this product. No installation, adjustment, maintenance or repairs
should be performed by either the operator or the user.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
iii
Front Matter
Installation and Operation Manual
Handling Energized Products
General Safety Practices
Do not touch or tamper with the power supply when the power cord is connected. Line voltages
may be present inside certain products even when the power switch (if installed) is in the OFF
position or a fuse is blown. For DC-powered products, although the voltages levels are usually
not hazardous, energy hazards may still exist.
Before working on equipment connected to power lines or telecommunication lines, remove
jewelry or any other metallic object that may come into contact with energized parts.
Unless otherwise specified, all products are intended to be grounded during normal use.
Grounding is provided by connecting the mains plug to a wall socket with a protective ground
terminal. If a ground lug is provided on the product, it should be connected to the protective
ground at all times, by a wire with a diameter of 18 AWG or wider. Rack-mounted equipment
should be mounted only in grounded racks and cabinets.
Always make the ground connection first and disconnect it last. Do not connect
telecommunication cables to ungrounded equipment. Make sure that all other cables are
disconnected before disconnecting the ground.
Some products may have panels secured by thumbscrews with a slotted head. These panels may
cover hazardous circuits or parts, such as power supplies. These thumbscrews should therefore
always be tightened securely with a screwdriver after both initial installation and subsequent
access to the panels.
Connecting AC Mains
Make sure that the electrical installation complies with local codes.
Always connect the AC plug to a wall socket with a protective ground.
The maximum permissible current capability of the branch distribution circuit that supplies power
to the product is 16A (20A for USA and Canada). The circuit breaker in the building installation
should have high breaking capacity and must operate at short-circuit current exceeding 35A (40A
for USA and Canada).
Always connect the power cord first to the equipment and then to the wall socket. If a power
switch is provided in the equipment, set it to the OFF position. If the power cord cannot be
readily disconnected in case of emergency, make sure that a readily accessible circuit breaker or
emergency switch is installed in the building installation.
In cases when the power distribution system is IT type, the switch must disconnect both poles
simultaneously.
Connecting DC Power
Unless otherwise specified in the manual, the DC input to the equipment is floating in reference
to the ground. Any single pole can be externally grounded.
Due to the high current capability of DC power systems, care should be taken when connecting
the DC supply to avoid short-circuits and fire hazards.
Make sure that the DC power supply is electrically isolated from any AC source and that the
installation complies with the local codes.
iv
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Front Matter
The maximum permissible current capability of the branch distribution circuit that supplies power
to the product is 16A (20A for USA and Canada). The circuit breaker in the building installation
should have high breaking capacity and must operate at short-circuit current exceeding 35A (40A
for USA and Canada).
Before connecting the DC supply wires, ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit. Locate
the circuit breaker of the panel board that services the equipment and switch it to the OFF
position. When connecting the DC supply wires, first connect the ground wire to the
corresponding terminal, then the positive pole and last the negative pole. Switch the circuit
breaker back to the ON position.
A readily accessible disconnect device that is suitably rated and approved should be incorporated
in the building installation.
If the DC power supply is floating, the switch must disconnect both poles simultaneously.
Connecting Data and Telecommunications Cables
Data and telecommunication interfaces are classified according to their safety status.
The following table lists the status of several standard interfaces. If the status of a given port
differs from the standard one, a notice will be given in the manual.
Ports
Safety Status
V.11, V.28, V.35, V.36, RS-530, X.21,
10 BaseT, 100 BaseT, Unbalanced E1,
E2, E3, STM, DS-2, DS-3, S-Interface
ISDN, Analog voice E&M
SELV
xDSL (without feeding voltage),
Balanced E1, T1, Sub E1/T1
TNV-1 Telecommunication Network Voltage-1:
Ports whose normal operating voltage is within the
limits of SELV, on which overvoltages from
telecommunications networks are possible.
FXS (Foreign Exchange Subscriber)
TNV-2 Telecommunication Network Voltage-2:
Ports whose normal operating voltage exceeds the
limits of SELV (usually up to 120 VDC or telephone
ringing voltages), on which overvoltages from
telecommunication networks are not possible. These
ports are not permitted to be directly connected to
external telephone and data lines.
FXO (Foreign Exchange Office), xDSL
(with feeding voltage), U-Interface
ISDN
TNV-3 Telecommunication Network Voltage-3:
Ports whose normal operating voltage exceeds the
limits of SELV (usually up to 120 VDC or telephone
ringing voltages), on which overvoltages from
telecommunication networks are possible.
Safety Extra Low Voltage:
Ports which do not present a safety hazard. Usually
up to 30 VAC or 60 VDC.
Always connect a given port to a port of the same safety status. If in doubt, seek the assistance
of a qualified safety engineer.
Always make sure that the equipment is grounded before connecting telecommunication cables.
Do not disconnect the ground connection before disconnecting all telecommunications cables.
Some SELV and non-SELV circuits use the same connectors. Use caution when connecting cables.
Extra caution should be exercised during thunderstorms.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
v
Front Matter
Installation and Operation Manual
When using shielded or coaxial cables, verify that there is a good ground connection at both
ends. The grounding and bonding of the ground connections should comply with the local codes.
The telecommunication wiring in the building may be damaged or present a fire hazard in case of
contact between exposed external wires and the AC power lines. In order to reduce the risk,
there are restrictions on the diameter of wires in the telecom cables, between the equipment
and the mating connectors.
Caution
To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication
line cords.
Attention
Pour réduire les risques s’incendie, utiliser seulement des conducteurs de
télécommunications 26 AWG ou de section supérieure.
Some ports are suitable for connection to intra-building or non-exposed wiring or cabling only. In
such cases, a notice will be given in the installation instructions.
Do not attempt to tamper with any carrier-provided equipment or connection hardware.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
The equipment is designed and approved to comply with the electromagnetic regulations of
major regulatory bodies. The following instructions may enhance the performance of the
equipment and will provide better protection against excessive emission and better immunity
against disturbances.
A good ground connection is essential. When installing the equipment in a rack, make sure to
remove all traces of paint from the mounting points. Use suitable lock-washers and torque. If an
external grounding lug is provided, connect it to the ground bus using braided wire as short as
possible.
The equipment is designed to comply with EMC requirements when connecting it with unshielded
twisted pair (UTP) cables. However, the use of shielded wires is always recommended, especially
for high-rate data. In some cases, when unshielded wires are used, ferrite cores should be
installed on certain cables. In such cases, special instructions are provided in the manual.
Disconnect all wires which are not in permanent use, such as cables used for one-time
configuration.
The compliance of the equipment with the regulations for conducted emission on the data lines
is dependent on the cable quality. The emission is tested for UTP with 80 dB longitudinal
conversion loss (LCL).
Unless otherwise specified or described in the manual, TNV-1 and TNV-3 ports provide secondary
protection against surges on the data lines. Primary protectors should be provided in the building
installation.
The equipment is designed to provide adequate protection against electro-static discharge (ESD).
However, it is good working practice to use caution when connecting cables terminated with
plastic connectors (without a grounded metal hood, such as flat cables) to sensitive data lines.
Before connecting such cables, discharge yourself by touching ground or wear an ESD preventive
wrist strap.
vi
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Front Matter
FCC-15 User Information
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of the Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the Installation and Operation manual, may cause harmful interference to the
radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
Canadian Emission Requirements
This Class A digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing
Equipment Regulation.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel
brouilleur du Canada.
Warning per EN 55022 (CISPR-22)
Warning
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause
radio interference, in which case the user will be required to take adequate
measures.
Avertissement
Cet appareil est un appareil de Classe A. Dans un environnement résidentiel,
cet appareil peut provoquer des brouillages radioélectriques. Dans ces cas, il
peut être demandé à l’utilisateur de prendre les mesures appropriées.
Achtung
Das vorliegende Gerät fällt unter die Funkstörgrenzwertklasse A. In
Wohngebieten können beim Betrieb dieses Gerätes Rundfunkströrungen
auftreten, für deren Behebung der Benutzer verantwortlich ist.
ASMi-54L
vii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Front Matter
Installation and Operation Manual
Français
Mise au rebut du produit
Afin de faciliter la réutilisation, le recyclage ainsi que d'autres formes de
récupération d'équipement mis au rebut dans le cadre de la protection de
l'environnement, il est demandé au propriétaire de ce produit RAD de ne pas
mettre ce dernier au rebut en tant que déchet municipal non trié, une fois que le
produit est arrivé en fin de cycle de vie. Le client devrait proposer des solutions
de réutilisation, de recyclage ou toute autre forme de mise au rebut de cette
unité dans un esprit de protection de l'environnement, lorsqu'il aura fini de
l'utiliser.
Instructions générales de sécurité
Les instructions suivantes servent de guide général d'installation et d'opération sécurisées des
produits de télécommunications. Des instructions supplémentaires sont éventuellement
indiquées dans le manuel.
Symboles de sécurité
Ce symbole peut apparaitre sur l'équipement ou dans le texte. Il indique des
risques potentiels de sécurité pour l'opérateur ou le personnel de service,
quant à l'opération du produit ou à sa maintenance.
Avertissement
Danger de choc électrique ! Evitez tout contact avec la surface marquée
tant que le produit est sous tension ou connecté à des lignes externes de
télécommunications.
Mise à la terre de protection : la cosse ou la borne marquée devrait être
connectée à la prise de terre de protection du bâtiment.
viii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Avertissement
Front Matter
Certains produits peuvent être équipés d'une diode laser. Dans de tels cas,
une étiquette indiquant la classe laser ainsi que d'autres avertissements, le
cas échéant, sera jointe près du transmetteur optique. Le symbole
d'avertissement laser peut aussi être joint.
Veuillez observer les précautions suivantes :
•
Avant la mise en marche de l'équipement, assurez-vous que le câble de
fibre optique est intact et qu'il est connecté au transmetteur.
•
Ne tentez pas d'ajuster le courant de la commande laser.
•
N'utilisez pas des câbles ou connecteurs de fibre optique cassés ou sans
terminaison et n'observez pas directement un rayon laser.
•
L'usage de périphériques optiques avec l'équipement augmentera le
risque pour les yeux.
•
L'usage de contrôles, ajustages ou procédures autres que celles
spécifiées ici pourrait résulter en une dangereuse exposition aux
radiations.
ATTENTION : Le rayon laser peut être invisible !
Les utilisateurs pourront, dans certains cas, insérer leurs propres émetteurs-récepteurs Laser SFP
dans le produit. Les utilisateurs sont avertis que RAD ne pourra pas être tenue responsable de
tout dommage pouvant résulter de l'utilisation d'émetteurs-récepteurs non conformes. Plus
particulièrement, les utilisateurs sont avertis de n'utiliser que des produits approuvés par
l'agence et conformes à la réglementation locale de sécurité laser pour les produits laser de
classe 1.
Respectez toujours les précautions standards de sécurité durant l'installation, l'opération et la
maintenance de ce produit. Seul le personnel de service qualifié et autorisé devrait effectuer
l'ajustage, la maintenance ou les réparations de ce produit. Aucune opération d'installation,
d'ajustage, de maintenance ou de réparation ne devrait être effectuée par l'opérateur ou
l'utilisateur.
Manipuler des produits sous tension
Règles générales de sécurité
Ne pas toucher ou altérer l'alimentation en courant lorsque le câble d'alimentation est branché.
Des tensions de lignes peuvent être présentes dans certains produits, même lorsque le
commutateur (s'il est installé) est en position OFF ou si le fusible est rompu. Pour les produits
alimentés par CC, les niveaux de tension ne sont généralement pas dangereux mais des risques
de courant peuvent toujours exister.
Avant de travailler sur un équipement connecté aux lignes de tension ou de télécommunications,
retirez vos bijoux ou tout autre objet métallique pouvant venir en contact avec les pièces sous
tension.
Sauf s'il en est autrement indiqué, tous les produits sont destinés à être mis à la terre durant
l'usage normal. La mise à la terre est fournie par la connexion de la fiche principale à une prise
murale équipée d'une borne protectrice de mise à la terre. Si une cosse de mise à la terre est
fournie avec le produit, elle devrait être connectée à tout moment à une mise à la terre de
protection par un conducteur de diamètre 18 AWG ou plus. L'équipement monté en châssis ne
devrait être monté que sur des châssis et dans des armoires mises à la terre.
Branchez toujours la mise à la terre en premier et débranchez-la en dernier. Ne branchez pas des
câbles de télécommunications à un équipement qui n'est pas mis à la terre. Assurez-vous que
tous les autres câbles sont débranchés avant de déconnecter la mise à la terre.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ix
Français
Installation and Operation Manual
Front Matter
Installation and Operation Manual
Français
Connexion au courant du secteur
Assurez-vous que l'installation électrique est conforme à la réglementation locale.
Branchez toujours la fiche de secteur à une prise murale équipée d'une borne protectrice de mise
à la terre.
La capacité maximale permissible en courant du circuit de distribution de la connexion alimentant
le produit est de 16A (20A aux Etats-Unis et Canada). Le coupe-circuit dans l'installation du
bâtiment devrait avoir une capacité élevée de rupture et devrait fonctionner sur courant de
court-circuit dépassant 35A (40A aux Etats-Unis et Canada).
Branchez toujours le câble d'alimentation en premier à l'équipement puis à la prise murale. Si un
commutateur est fourni avec l'équipement, fixez-le en position OFF. Si le câble d'alimentation ne
peut pas être facilement débranché en cas d'urgence, assurez-vous qu'un coupe-circuit ou un
disjoncteur d'urgence facilement accessible est installé dans l'installation du bâtiment.
Le disjoncteur devrait déconnecter simultanément les deux pôles si le système de distribution de
courant est de type IT.
Connexion d'alimentation CC
Sauf s'il en est autrement spécifié dans le manuel, l'entrée CC de l'équipement est flottante par
rapport à la mise à la terre. Tout pôle doit être mis à la terre en externe.
A cause de la capacité de courant des systèmes à alimentation CC, des précautions devraient
être prises lors de la connexion de l'alimentation CC pour éviter des courts-circuits et des risques
d'incendie.
Assurez-vous que l'alimentation CC est isolée de toute source de courant CA (secteur) et que
l'installation est conforme à la réglementation locale.
La capacité maximale permissible en courant du circuit de distribution de la connexion alimentant
le produit est de 16A (20A aux Etats-Unis et Canada). Le coupe-circuit dans l'installation du
bâtiment devrait avoir une capacité élevée de rupture et devrait fonctionner sur courant de
court-circuit dépassant 35A (40A aux Etats-Unis et Canada).
Avant la connexion des câbles d'alimentation en courant CC, assurez-vous que le circuit CC n'est
pas sous tension. Localisez le coupe-circuit dans le tableau desservant l'équipement et fixez-le
en position OFF. Lors de la connexion de câbles d'alimentation CC, connectez d'abord le
conducteur de mise à la terre à la borne correspondante, puis le pôle positif et en dernier, le
pôle négatif. Remettez le coupe-circuit en position ON.
Un disjoncteur facilement accessible, adapté et approuvé devrait être intégré à l'installation du
bâtiment.
Le disjoncteur devrait déconnecter simultanément les deux pôles si l'alimentation en courant CC
est flottante.
x
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Manufacturer's Name:
RAD Data Communications Ltd.
Manufacturer's Address:
24 Raoul Wallenberg St.
Tel Aviv 6971920
Israel
Declares that the product:
Product Name:
ASMi-54L
Product Options:
All
Conforms to the following standard(s) or other normative document(s):
EMC
Safety
EN 55022:2010
Information technology equipment – Radio disturbance characteristics –
Limits and methods of measurement.
EN 55024:2010
Information technology equipment – Immunity characteristics –
Limits and methods of measurement.
EN 61000-3-2:2006
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-2: Limits Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current ≤ 16A per
phase)
EN 61000-3-3:2008
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-3: Limits Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in public lowvoltage supply systems, for equipment with rated current ≤ 16A per phase
and not subject to conditional connection.
EN 60950-1:2006 +
A11:2009, A1:2010
+ A12:2011
Information technology equipment – Safety – Part 1:
General requirements.
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC, the Low Voltage
Directive 2006/95/EC, the R&TTE Directive 99/5/EC for wired equipment and the ROHS Directive 2011/65/EU.
The product was tested in a typical configuration.
Tel Aviv, 1 January 2013
Nathaniel Shomroni
Homologation Team Leader
European Contact:
RAD Data Communications GmbH
Otto-Hahn-Str. 28-30, D-85521 Ottobrunn-Riemerling, Germany
ASMi-54L.doc 01/13
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Front Matter
Installation and Operation Manual
Glossary
Address
A coded representation of the origin or destination of data.
Agent
In SNMP, this refers to the managed system.
Analog
A continuous wave or signal (such as human voice).
Analog Loopback
A testing technique that isolates faults in transmission equipment by
performing a loopback on the data at the analog (line) side of the
modem.
Attenuation
Signal power loss through equipment, lines or other transmission
devices. Measured in decibels.
AWG
The American Wire Gauge System, which specifies wire width.
Balanced
A transmission line in which voltages on the two conductors are equal
in magnitude, but opposite in polarity, with respect to ground.
Bandwidth
The range of frequencies passing through a given circuit. The greater
the bandwidth, the more information can be sent through the circuit
in a given amount of time.
Baud
Unit of signaling speed equivalent to the number of discrete
conditions or events per second. If each signal event represents only
one bit condition, baud rate equals bps (bits per second).
Bipolar
Signaling method in E1/T1 representing a binary “1” by alternating
positive and negative pulses, and a binary “0” by absence of pulses.
Bridge
A device interconnecting local area networks at the OSI data link layer,
filtering and forwarding frames according to media access control
(MAC) addresses.
Buffer
A storage device. Commonly used to compensate for differences in
data rates or event timing when transmitting from one device to
another. Also used to remove jitter.
Channel
A path for electrical transmission between two or more points. Also
called a link, line, circuit or facility.
CLI
Command Line Interface (CLI) is a mechanism for interacting with a
RAD product by typing commands in response to a prompt.
Clock
A term for the source(s) of timing signals used in synchronous
transmission.
Congestion
A state in which the network is overloaded and starts to discard user
data (frames, cells or packets).
Current Loop
Method of data transmission. A mark (binary “1”) is represented by
current on the line, and a space (binary “0”) is represented by the
absence of current.
xii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Front Matter
Data
Information represented in digital form, including voice, text, facsimile
and video.
dBm
A measure of power in communications: the decibel in reference to
one milliwatt (0 dBm = 1 milliwatt and -30 dBm = .001 milliwatt).
Diagnostics
The detection and isolation of a malfunction or mistake in a
communications device, network or system.
Digital
The binary (“1” or “0”) output of a computer or terminal. In data
communications, an alternating, non-continuous (pulsating) signal.
Digital Loopback
A technique for testing the digital processing of a communications
device. The loopback is toward the line side of a modem, but tests
most of the circuitry in the modem under test.
E1 Line
A 2.048 Mbps line, common in Europe, that supports thirty-two 64
kbps channels, each of which can transmit and receive data or
digitized voice. The line uses framing and signaling to achieve
synchronous and reliable transmission. The most common
configurations for E1 lines are E1 PRI, and unchannelized E1.
Encapsulation
Encapsulating data is a technique used by layered protocols in which a
low level protocol accepts a message from a higher level protocol,
then places it in the data portion of the lower-level frame. The
logistics of encapsulation require that packets traveling over a physical
network contain a sequence of headers.
Ethernet
A local area network (LAN) technology which has extended into the
wide area networks. Ethernet operates at many speeds, including data
rates of 10 Mbps (Ethernet), 100 Mbps (Fast Ethernet), 1,000 Mbps
(Gigabit Ethernet), 10 Gbps, 40 Gbps, and 100 Gbps.
Flow Control
A congestion control mechanism that results in an ATM system
implementing flow control.
Frame
A logical grouping of information sent as a link-layer unit over a
transmission medium. The terms packet, datagram, segment, and
message are also used to describe logical information groupings.
Framing
At the physical and data link layers of the OSI model, bits are fit into
units called frames. Frames contain source and destination
information, flags to designate the start and end of the frame, plus
information about the integrity of the frame. All other information,
such as network protocols and the actual payload of data, is
encapsulated in a packet, which is encapsulated in the frame.
Full Duplex
A circuit or device permitting transmission in two directions (sending
and receiving) at the same time.
G.703
An ITU standard for the physical and electrical characteristics of
various digital interfaces, including those at 64 kbps and 2.048 Mbps.
Gateway
Gateways are points of entrance and exit from a communications
network. Viewed as a physical entity, a gateway is that node that
translates between two otherwise incompatible networks or network
segments. Gateways perform code and protocol conversion to
facilitate traffic between data highways of differing architecture.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
xiii
Front Matter
Installation and Operation Manual
Half Duplex
A circuit or device capable of transmitting in two directions, but not at
the same time.
HDLC (High-Level Data
Link Control)
A synchronous, bit-oriented link layer protocol for data transmission.
Frame Relay is an example of an HDLCbased packet protocol.
Impedance
The combined effect of resistance, inductance and capacitance on a
transmitted signal. Impedance varies at different frequencies.
Interface
A shared boundary, defined by common physical interconnection
characteristics, signal characteristics, and meanings of exchanged
signals.
IP Address
Also known as an Internet address. A unique string of numbers that
identifies a computer or device on a TCP/IP network. The format of an
IP address is a 32-bit numeric address written as four numbers from 0
to 255, separated by periods (for example, 1.0.255.123).
Jitter
The deviation of a transmission signal in time or phase. It can
introduce errors and loss of synchronization in high speed
synchronous communications.
Loading
The addition of inductance to a line in order to minimize amplitude
distortion. Used commonly on public telephone lines to improve voice
quality, it can make the lines impassable to high speed data, and
baseband modems.
Loopback
A type of diagnostic test in which the transmitted signal is returned to
the sending device after passing through all or part of a
communications link or network.
Manager
An application that receives Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) information from an agent. An agent and manager share a
database of information, called the Management Information Base
(MIB). An agent can use a message called a traps-PDU to send
unsolicited information to the manager. A manager that uses the
RADview MIB can query the RAD device, set parameters, sound alarms
when certain conditions appear, and perform other administrative
tasks.
Master Clock
The source of timing signals (or the signals themselves) that all
network stations use for synchronization.
Network
(1) An interconnected group of nodes. (2) A series of points, nodes,
or stations connected by communications channels; the collection of
equipment through which connections are made between data
stations.
Packet
An ordered group of data and control signals transmitted through a
network, as a subset of a larger message.
Parameters
Parameters are often called arguments, and the two words are used
interchangeably. However, some computer languages such as C define
argument to mean actual parameter (i.e., the value), and parameter
to mean formal parameter. In RAD CLI, parameter means formal
parameter, not value.
Payload
The 48-byte segment of the ATM cell containing user data. Any
adaptation of user data via the AAL will take place within the payload.
xiv
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Front Matter
Physical Layer
Layer 1 of the OSI model. The layer concerned with electrical,
mechanical, and handshaking procedures over the interface
connecting a device to the transmission medium.
Port
The physical interface to a computer or multiplexer, for connection of
terminals and modems.
Prioritization
Also called CoS (class of service), classifies traffic into categories such
as high, medium, and low. The lower the priority, the more “drop
eligible” is a packet. When the network gets busy, prioritization
ensures critical or high-rated traffic is passed first, and packets from
the lowest categories may be dropped.
prompt
One or more characters in a command line interface to indicate that
the computer is ready to accept typed input.
Protocol
A formal set of conventions governing the formatting and relative
timing of message exchange between two communicating systems.
Repeater
A device which automatically amplifies, restores or reshapes signals to
compensate for distortion and/or attenuation prior to retransmission.
Router
An interconnection device that connects individual LANs. Unlike
bridges, which logically connect at OSI Layer 2, routers provide logical
paths at OSI Layer 3. Like bridges, remote sites can be connected
using routers over dedicated or switched lines to create WANs.
Space
In telecommunications, the absence of a signal. Equivalent to a binary
0.
Sync
See Synchronous Transmission.
Telnet
The virtual terminal protocol in the Internet suite of protocols. It lets
users on one host access another host and work as terminal users of
that remote host. Instead of dialing into the computer, the user
connects to it over the Internet using Telnet. When issuing a Telnet
session, it connects to the Telnet host and logs in. The connection
enables the user to work with the remote machine as though a
terminal was connected to it.
VLAN-Aware
A device that is doing the Layer 2 bridging according to the VLAN tag
in addition to the standard bridging parameters. A VLAN-aware device
will not strip or add any VLAN header.
VLAN Stacking
A technique that lets carriers offer multiple virtual LANs over a single
circuit. In essence, the carrier creates an Ethernet virtual private
network to tunnel customer VLANs across its WAN; this helps avoid
name conflicts among customers of service providers who connect to
the carrier. Stacking works by assigning two VLAN IDs to each frame
header. One is a "backbone" VLAN ID used by the service provider; the
other one has up to 4,096 unique 802.1Q VLAN tags.
VLAN Stripping
Removal of VLAN tags from a network frame
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
xv
Front Matter
xvi
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Quick Start Guide
The ASMi-54L should be installed by an experienced technician only. If you are
familiar with the ASMi-54L, use this guide to prepare the unit for operation.
1.
Installing ASMi-54L
Connecting the Interfaces

To connect the interfaces:
1. Connect the user LAN to one of four RJ-45 connectors designated
10/100BaseT.
2. Connect the optional E1 line to the RJ-45 connector designated E1.
3. Connect the control terminal to the rear panel CONTROL connector.
or
Connect a Telnet host, or a PC running a Web-based application, or an SNMP
management station to one of the Ethernet ports.
Connecting the Power

To connect the power:
•
Connect the power cable to the power socket on the ASMi-54L rear panel and
the other end to the power outlet.
The unit has no power switch. Operation starts when the power is applied to
the power connector.
2.
Configuring ASMi-54L
Configure ASMi-54L for the desired operation mode via an ASCII terminal
connected to the rear panel CONTROL port. After configuring, you can manage
the unit using Telnet, or a PC running a Web-based application, or SNMP via the
Ethernet port or inband.
Note
Remote management requires the configuration of an IP address (see Configuring
for management section below or Chapter 4).
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring ASMi-54L
1
Quick Start Guide
Installation and Operation Manual
Starting a Terminal Session

To start a terminal session:
1. Turn on the control terminal PC and set its default port parameters to
115200 bps, 8 bits/character, 1 stop bit, no parity.
2. Set the terminal emulator to ANSI VT100 emulation (for optimal view of
system menus).
3. Set the terminal screen to show 132 characters.
4. Enter your user name and password, and proceed with the management
session.
Note
The default user name is su, and the default password is 1234.
Configuring ASMi-54L SHDSL Ports
When working with two devices back to back, one device should be configured as
CO - Central Office (Central) and the other device as CPE-Customer Premise
Equipment (Remote). The factory default setting is CPE (Remote), so only one
device needs to be changed.

To configure ASMi-54L SHDSL ports:
1. Select Main Menu>Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Line.
2. Set one device to STU = central and leave the other as STU = remote.
Configuring ASMi-54L for Management

To define the Host IP parameters:
1. From the Main menu, select Configuration>System>Management>Host, select
DHCP parameter, and define it as Disable.
1. Return to the Host screen and configure the following parameters:

IP address

Mask

Default gateway

Read Community

Write Community

Trap Community.
2. Select Configuration>System> Management>Host>Encapsulation, and
configure Host tagging (untagged/tagged). Note that selecting the tagged
option displays the following additional parameters that need to be defined:
2

Host VLAN ID [1-4094]

Host Priority Tag.
Configuring ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Quick Start Guide
3. To configure Management Host Tagging to Tagged mode, select Main Menu>
Configuration>Application>Bridge, and set the VLAN Mode at bridge
configuration to Aware mode.

To configure the manager IP addresses:
•

To configure the clock source:
•

Select Main Menu>Configuration>System>Clock>Master Clock, set the clock
source as Internal or Receive (external clock from the E1 link), and press <S>.
To configure the date and time parameters:
•

Select Main Menu>Configuration>System>Management>Managers List, and
enter the manager IP address(es).
Select Main Menu>Configuration>System>Date and Time, set the parameters
as prompted in the screen, and press <S>.
To enable the fault propagation:
•
Select Main Menu>Configuration>System>Fault Propagation, set the user
fault propagation as Enable, and press <S>.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring ASMi-54L
3
Quick Start Guide
4
Configuring ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Contents
Chapter 1. Introduction
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Overview .............................................................................................................................. 1-1
Product Options ................................................................................................................. 1-1
Applications ....................................................................................................................... 1-2
Features ............................................................................................................................ 1-3
Extensive SHDSL Functionality ....................................................................................... 1-3
E1 Interface Flexibility ................................................................................................... 1-4
Multiple Fast Ethernet Interfaces .................................................................................. 1-4
Link OAM....................................................................................................................... 1-4
WAN Protocol ................................................................................................................ 1-4
PCS ............................................................................................................................... 1-4
Bridging ........................................................................................................................ 1-4
Ingress Rate Limitation ................................................................................................. 1-5
Quality of Service .......................................................................................................... 1-5
Fault Propagation .......................................................................................................... 1-5
Timing ........................................................................................................................... 1-5
Management ................................................................................................................. 1-5
Diagnostics ................................................................................................................... 1-6
Event Log File ................................................................................................................ 1-7
Statistics ....................................................................................................................... 1-7
Dying Gasp .................................................................................................................... 1-7
What’s New in this Version................................................................................................... 1-7
Physical Description ............................................................................................................. 1-7
Functional Description .......................................................................................................... 1-8
Interfaces .......................................................................................................................... 1-8
Flow Control and Autonegotiation................................................................................. 1-8
WAN Interface ............................................................................................................... 1-8
Supervisory Port ............................................................................................................ 1-8
Ethernet Access (Bridge).................................................................................................... 1-8
VLAN-Aware Mode ........................................................................................................ 1-9
VLAN-Unaware Mode .................................................................................................. 1-12
VLAN Stacking ............................................................................................................. 1-13
VLAN Stripping ............................................................................................................ 1-13
Quality of Service ............................................................................................................. 1-13
Management Functionality ............................................................................................... 1-14
Inband Management ................................................................................................... 1-14
Management Access ................................................................................................... 1-14
VLAN-Based Management Scheme .............................................................................. 1-14
Management Security.................................................................................................. 1-15
Statistics .......................................................................................................................... 1-15
Event Log File .................................................................................................................. 1-15
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting ..................................................................................... 1-15
Technical Specifications...................................................................................................... 1-16
Chapter 2. Installation and Setup
2.1
2.2
2.3
Site Requirements and Prerequisites .................................................................................... 2-1
Package Contents................................................................................................................. 2-2
Required Equipment ............................................................................................................. 2-2
Hand Tools and Kits ........................................................................................................... 2-2
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
i
Table of Contents
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
Installation and Operation Manual
Cables ................................................................................................................................ 2-2
Mounting ASMi-54L .............................................................................................................. 2-2
Rear Panel Interface Options ................................................................................................ 2-3
Connecting to Ethernet Equipment....................................................................................... 2-3
Connecting to E1 Equipment ................................................................................................ 2-4
Connecting to SHDSL Equipment .......................................................................................... 2-4
Connecting to an ASCII Terminal ........................................................................................... 2-5
Connecting to Power ............................................................................................................ 2-5
Connecting AC Power ......................................................................................................... 2-6
Connecting DC Power......................................................................................................... 2-6
Connecting DC Power via a Dual AC/DC Power Input Connector ..................................... 2-6
Connecting DC Power via a DC Power Input Connector .................................................. 2-7
Chapter 3. Operation
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Turning On the Unit ............................................................................................................. 3-1
Indicators ............................................................................................................................. 3-1
Front Panel Indicators ........................................................................................................ 3-1
Rear Panel Indicators ......................................................................................................... 3-2
Default Settings ................................................................................................................... 3-3
Configuration and Management Alternatives ........................................................................ 3-6
Working with Terminal ....................................................................................................... 3-6
Login ............................................................................................................................. 3-8
Choosing Options .......................................................................................................... 3-9
Screen Example ............................................................................................................. 3-9
Navigating Tables .......................................................................................................... 3-9
Help Screen Example ................................................................................................... 3-11
Ending a Terminal Configuration Session ..................................................................... 3-11
Working with RAD’s Web-based Management Application ................................................ 3-11
Web Browser Requirements ........................................................................................ 3-11
Logging In ................................................................................................................... 3-12
Navigating the Web-based Management Application Menus ........................................ 3-12
Working with RADview-EMS ............................................................................................. 3-13
Menu Map ........................................................................................................................ 3-13
Turning Off the Unit ........................................................................................................... 3-19
Chapter 4. Configuration
4.1
4.2
Configuring for Management ................................................................................................ 4-1
Entering Device Information............................................................................................... 4-1
Setting IP Host Parameters ................................................................................................ 4-2
Configuring the Network Managers .................................................................................... 4-4
Configuring Management Access........................................................................................ 4-5
Setting Terminal Parameters .............................................................................................. 4-5
Configuring for Operation .................................................................................................... 4-6
Configuring the Clock Source ............................................................................................. 4-6
Configuring Fault Propagation ............................................................................................ 4-7
Configuring Date and Time................................................................................................. 4-8
Setting Physical Layer Parameters .................................................................................... 4-12
Configuring the Ethernet Port ..................................................................................... 4-12
Configuring the E1 Port ............................................................................................... 4-14
Configuring the SHDSL Line ......................................................................................... 4-17
Configuring the SHDSL Line Current Margin ................................................................. 4-24
Configuring the SHDSL Line Worst Margin ................................................................... 4-25
ii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
4.3
Table of Contents
Configuring SHDSL Line Repeaters .............................................................................. 4-26
Configuring Link OAM .................................................................................................. 4-27
Configuring the SHDSL Physical Coding Sublayer (PCS) ................................................ 4-29
Configuring the SHDSL DS1 ......................................................................................... 4-30
Assigning Timeslots ..................................................................................................... 4-32
Configuring the Internal Bridge ................................................................................... 4-35
Configuring Quality of Service (QoS) ................................................................................ 4-41
Selecting a Traffic Classification Method ..................................................................... 4-42
Assigning Priorities to Traffic Queues for 802.1p ........................................................ 4-43
Assigning Priorities to Traffic Queues for DSCP ........................................................... 4-44
Assigning Priorities to Traffic Queues Per Bridge Port ................................................. 4-45
Assigning an Operation Scheduling Mode .................................................................... 4-46
Performing Additional Tasks ............................................................................................... 4-46
Displaying the Inventory .................................................................................................. 4-46
Changing User Name and Password ................................................................................. 4-47
Transferring Software and Configuration Files ................................................................. 4-48
TFTP Application .......................................................................................................... 4-49
Transferring Files via XMODEM .................................................................................... 4-54
Displaying and Clearing a File Transfer Statistics ......................................................... 4-57
Resetting ASMi-54L ......................................................................................................... 4-58
Resetting to the Default Settings ................................................................................ 4-58
Resetting the Unit ....................................................................................................... 4-59
Resetting the PCS ....................................................................................................... 4-60
Chapter 5. Monitoring and Diagnostics
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
Monitoring Performance ....................................................................................................... 5-1
Displaying System Information ........................................................................................... 5-1
Displaying Physical Layer Information ................................................................................ 5-3
Displaying the Ethernet Port Status .............................................................................. 5-3
Displaying the Link OAM Status ..................................................................................... 5-4
Displaying the E1 Port Status ........................................................................................ 5-7
Displaying the SHDSL Port Status .................................................................................. 5-7
Displaying Application Level Status .................................................................................. 5-12
Displaying Interface Statistics .......................................................................................... 5-13
Displaying Ethernet Port Statistics .............................................................................. 5-13
Displaying Link OAM Statistics ..................................................................................... 5-16
Clearing Ethernet Port Statistics .................................................................................. 5-17
Displaying E1 Port Statistics ........................................................................................ 5-17
Displaying SHDSL Port Statistics .................................................................................. 5-20
Clearing the SHDSL Port Statistics .................................................................................... 5-27
Detecting Errors ................................................................................................................. 5-28
Handling Alarms and Traps ................................................................................................. 5-28
Viewing and Masking Alarms and Traps ............................................................................ 5-28
List of Alarm Traps ........................................................................................................... 5-28
Handling Alarms ............................................................................................................... 5-29
Displaying the Event Log File............................................................................................ 5-30
Refreshing the Event Log File........................................................................................... 5-32
Clearing the Event Log File ............................................................................................... 5-32
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................. 5-32
Checking Sanity................................................................................................................ 5-32
Troubleshooting Chart ..................................................................................................... 5-33
Testing the Unit ................................................................................................................. 5-33
E1 Port Diagnostics .......................................................................................................... 5-33
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
iii
Table of Contents
5.6
5.7
Installation and Operation Manual
Running Local Loopback Tests..................................................................................... 5-35
Running Remote Loopback Tests ................................................................................ 5-36
Deactivating E1 Loopbacks .......................................................................................... 5-37
Repeater Diagnostics ....................................................................................................... 5-37
Running Local Loopback Tests..................................................................................... 5-38
Running Remote Loopback Tests ................................................................................ 5-38
Deactivating Repeater Loopbacks ............................................................................... 5-39
Frequently Asked Questions ............................................................................................... 5-39
Technical Support ............................................................................................................... 5-40
Chapter 6. Software Upgrade
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
Compatibility ........................................................................................................................ 6-1
Impact .................................................................................................................................. 6-1
Prerequisites ........................................................................................................................ 6-1
Software Files .................................................................................................................... 6-1
System Requirements ........................................................................................................ 6-2
Software Upgrade Options ................................................................................................... 6-2
Upgrading ASMi-54L Software via the File Utilities Menu ...................................................... 6-2
Verifying the ASMi-54L Host Parameters............................................................................ 6-3
Activating the TFTP Server ................................................................................................. 6-3
Downloading the New Software Release File to ASMi-54L ................................................. 6-4
Upgrading ASMi-54L Software via VXWORKS Boot Manager ................................................. 6-4
Starting VXWORKS Boot Manager ...................................................................................... 6-5
Using the TFTP/FTP Protocol .............................................................................................. 6-8
Using the XMODEM Protocol .............................................................................................. 6-9
Chapter 7. Application Tutorial
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
Equipment List ..................................................................................................................... 7-1
Installing ASMi-54Ls ............................................................................................................. 7-2
Configuring the Local ASMi-54L ............................................................................................ 7-4
Configuring for Management ............................................................................................. 7-4
Accessing ASMi-54L ...................................................................................................... 7-4
Configuring the Host IP ................................................................................................. 7-5
Configuring the Network Managers ............................................................................... 7-6
Setting Management Access ......................................................................................... 7-7
Configuring Terminal Parameters ................................................................................... 7-7
Setting Date and Time .................................................................................................. 7-8
Configuring for Operation .................................................................................................. 7-8
Configuring the Ethernet Port ....................................................................................... 7-8
Configuring the E1 Port ................................................................................................. 7-9
Configuring the SHDSL Line ......................................................................................... 7-10
Configuring the Application .............................................................................................. 7-10
Configuring the Internal Bridge ................................................................................... 7-11
Configuring the Fault Propagation.................................................................................... 7-13
Configuring Quality of Service (QoS) ................................................................................ 7-13
Configuring Link OAM ....................................................................................................... 7-15
Configuring Link OAM Descriptors ............................................................................... 7-15
Configuring Link OAM Parameters ............................................................................... 7-16
Saving the Configuration File ........................................................................................... 7-16
Configuring the Remote ASMi-54L ...................................................................................... 7-17
Testing the Application ...................................................................................................... 7-18
Verifying Proper Data Transfer ......................................................................................... 7-18
iv
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
7.6
Table of Contents
Running Diagnostic Tests ................................................................................................. 7-19
Running E1 Loopback Tests ......................................................................................... 7-19
Running Repeater Loopback Tests .............................................................................. 7-21
Collecting Performance Statistics ....................................................................................... 7-21
Physical Layer Statistics .............................................................................................. 7-21
Event Reporting .......................................................................................................... 7-21
Appendix A. Connection Data
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
v
Table of Contents
vi
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Chapter 1
Introduction
1.1
Overview
ASMi-54L is a standalone managed SHDSL modem with SHDSL.bis and EFM
(Ethernet in the First Mile) technologies that provides up to 30 Mbps of
bandwidth over multiple data rates in full-duplex mode over 2-wire or 4-wire
lines. It provides E1 and Ethernet user interfaces, and multiple clock sources.
The modem provides monitoring, control, and diagnostics of a local unit via a
supervisory port (Control) and can be powered using a wide-range AC/DC or
24 VDC power supply.
The modem uses TC-PAM 16, TC-PAM 32, TC-PAM 64, or TC-PAM 128 line coding
SHDSL technology to transmit up to 15 Mbps of data, point-to-point, over each
copper pair with EFM bonding. This enables each link to synchronize at a different
rate (up to 1:4 ratios) and extends the range of digital interfaces. This device
offers longer distances and variable data rates of up to 15 Mbps over 2-wire and
30 Mbps over 4-wire. It can also work in HDLC mode over SHDSL lines in M-PAIR
mode (up to 11 Mbps of bandwidth over one pair and up to 22 Mbps of
bandwidth over two pairs).
EFM bonding ensures that a failure or an addition of a link does not drop the
traffic being transmitted over the other wires in the group, nor does the capacity
of the group decrease when a new link is added at lower rate. This is particularly
relevant for operators offering Ethernet services in the First Mile where fiber is
absent or impractical to install.
ASMi-54L is a desktop unit in a plastic or metal enclosure.
Product Options
ASMi-54L supports an SHDSL twisted pair wire-line connection (one or two pairs).
ASMi-54L supports the following user-configured DTE interfaces:
•
E1 (optional) per G.704 (framed) and G.703 (unframed)
•
Ethernet/Fast Ethernet bridge with VLAN support (combined with
management LAN port)
The modem has two power supply options:
•
AC/DC wide-range (100 to 240 VAC -48 to -60 VDC nominal)
•
-24 VDC nominal.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Overview
1-1
Chapter 1 Introduction
Installation and Operation Manual
Applications
Figure 1-1 shows a typical application that includes point-to-point Ethernet services.
Branch
Branch
E1
E1
2W or 4W
4 x ETH
4 x ETH
ASMi-54L
PBX
ASMi-54L
PBX
LAN
LAN
Figure 1-1. ASMi-54L Point-to-Point Application
Figure 1-2 shows an ASMi-54L application with a special RAD proprietary solution
providing extended rates over 2-wire line.
LAN
LAN
Rate
Limitation
2W or 4W
LAN
LAN
11.4 / 15 Mbps
ASMi-54L
ASMi-54L
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
Figure 1-2. ASMi-54L with Extended Rates over 2-wire
Figure 1-3 shows an ASMi-54L application over 2-wire with S-RPT repeater and
PFH-4 feeder.
LAN
LAN
Rate
Limitation
2W or 4W
LAN
LAN
11.4 Mbps
ASMi-54L
S-RPT
PFH
ASMi-54L
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
Figure 1-3. ASMi-54L over 2-wire with S-RPT Repeater and PFH-4 Feeder
Figure 1-4 shows an ASMi-54L application versus the Megaplex-4 unit.
SHDSL.bis
IP/GBE
ASMi-54L
GbE
LAN
SHDSL.bis
Megaplex-4
ASMi-54L
LAN
Figure 1-4. Megaplex-4 vs. ASMi-54L Application
1-2
Overview
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Figure 1-5 shows an ASMi-54L application versus LRS-102 with two ASMi-54C
cards installed.
Figure 1-5. LRS-102 vs. ASMi-54L Application
Features
Extensive SHDSL Functionality
ASMi-54L provides the following capabilities per SHDSL line:
•
Enhanced SHDSL ITU-T G.991.2 recommendation for user data rates:

EFM: 192 to 15296 kbps with steps of n x 64 kbps for each twisted pair

HDLC: 192 to 8576 kbps in steps of n x 64 where n=134 for each twisted
pair
•
Uses TC-PAM 16, TC-PAM 32, TC-PAM 64, or TC-PAM 128 to support higher
data rates for G.991.2 Annexes F and G
•
SHDSL twisted pair wire-line connection, one or two pairs
•
Can be configured to operate as a CO (Central Office) product or as a remote
CPE (Customer Premise Equipment) product
•
The line rate can be configured to adapt to the line condition (noise, loop
attenuation, and so on) or set to a fixed rate
•
Range up to 6.6 km at 192 kbps on 26 AWG
•
Uses Embedded Operations Channel (EOC) according to G.991.2
recommendation
•
Employs multiple (up to 4) SHDSL line repeaters according to TC-PAM 16
technology
•
Fully compatible for working with ASMi-54.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Overview
1-3
Chapter 1 Introduction
Installation and Operation Manual
E1 Interface Flexibility
The E1 interface handles framed and unframed E1. It uses HDB3 line coding and
provides a line interface of 120Ω balanced or 75Ω unbalanced (using an adaptor
cable).
Note
E1 interface is supported in HDLC TC layer mode only.
Multiple Fast Ethernet Interfaces
ASMi-54L provides four half-/full-duplex, 10/100 Mbps Fast Ethernet ports, with
flow control, autonegotiation, and DHCP support. All ports are used for user
traffic. The modem implements IEEE 802.1Q standards to provide VLAN-tagging
with four levels of prioritization, enabling carriers to offer differentiated Ethernet
services. VLAN tagging can also be employed to separate traffic, ensuring
transparency of the customer traffic and bolstering security of management
traffic.
Link OAM
ASMi-54L complies with standard IEEE 802.3ah (IEEE 802.3-2005) for Operation,
Administration, and Maintenance (OAM). The OAM mechanism protects the
Ethernet service layer by link performance monitoring and status reporting, fault
detection and event notification, and by performing local and remote diagnostics
tests.
WAN Protocol
ASMi-54L uses the following Wide Area Network (WAN) protocols:
•
EFM (Ethernet in First Mile)
•
HDLC (High-Level Data Link Control).
PCS
ASMi-54L follows the EFM naming convention, in which a group of pairs (up to
two in ASMi-54L) is called PCS (Physical Coding Sublayer).
The total bandwidth of the PCS port (the WAN direction) equals the sum of the
bandwidths of its underlying lines. The maximum rate of a single line is
5,696,000, and the maximum bandwidth of the PCS port is 11,392,000 bps (2 x
5,696,000).
Bridging
ASMi-54L provides a bridging function between the various bridge ports:
•
Ethernet ports
•
Internal host
•
SHDSL port.
The internal bridge operates in VLAN-Unaware or VLAN-Aware modes.
The VLAN-Aware bridge mode allows the user to create a subgroup of bridge
ports within the bridge. Each subgroup is associated with a unique VLAN Identifier
1-4
Overview
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
(VID). Frames can be forwarded only between bridge ports that are members of
the same VLAN, enabling a total separation of different VLAN users within the
same bridge. In VLAN-Unaware bridge mode, the bridge ignores VLAN tags and
forwards frames only according to their source and destination MAC addresses.
ASMi-54L supports QoS mapping from bridge ports and Ethernet VLAN priority,
VLAN stacking/stripping per bridge port, ingress and egress (ingress frames do
not support stacking).
Ingress Rate Limitation
ASMi-54L provides per-port Rate Limitation on the ingress direction.
Quality of Service
ASMi-54L supports Quality of Service (QoS) on DSL egress direction. Classification
is according to VLAN priority (802.1p), DSCP (bits 0-5 in IP TOS byte) and port
based. Mapping classification creates four transmit priority queues with strict
priority.
Fault Propagation
The Fault Propagation feature operates in the following modes:
Note
•
If User Fault Propagation is enabled, the LAN and E1 ports are deactivated
when all SHDSL lines go down. They reactivate after the PCS port is
resynchronized.
•
If Network Fault Propagation is enabled, the SHDSL ports are deactivated
when one of the LAN ports goes down. They reactivate after the LAN port is
resynchronized.
Only one Fault Propagation mode can be enabled.
Timing
ASMi-54L operates with the following clock sources:
•
Internal: Derived from the modem as a CO unit
•
Received: Derived from the DSL line on the CPE unit (independent of the
Ethernet or E1 interfaces), or from the E1 port in CO mode only, while
working with or without the Ethernet interface.
Management
Management Capabilities
ASMi-54L can be managed via:
•
An ASCII terminal connected to an RS-232 serial port
•
An inband management channel connected to an Ethernet or SHDSL port
(with or without dedicated VLAN encapsulation).
The following functions are supported by the internal management software:
•
Local terminal, Telnet server, SNMP (V1), Web server (RAD’s Web-based
management application), or RADview. Access to the ASMi-54L management
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Overview
1-5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Installation and Operation Manual
software can be limited to the ASCII terminal and RAD’s Web-based
management application by disabling the Telnet access.
RAD’s Web-based management application is a Web-based element
management system for remote device configuration and maintenance. It is
embedded in the unit and can be accessed from any standard Web browser.
Remote element management is available either through the RAD’s
Web-based management application or Telnet.
•
Inband management with/without dedicated management VLAN
•
Remote software and configuration download/upload via TFTP
•
Viewing system information
•
Modifying configuration and mode of operation, including setting system
default values and resetting the unit
•
Monitoring performance
•
Initiating connectivity tests
•
Upgrading software.
Embedded Operational Channel (EOC)
ASMi-54L provides an inband management channel (EOC) for end-to-end system
management and supervision. This management channel uses SHDSL overhead
bits and operates without interfering with data transmission.
ASMi-54L uses EOC to transfer proprietary data which enables remote
management and monitoring of the TDM and SHDSL ports between the central
office and the CPE ASMi-54L standalone devices.
When EOC is enabled, the E1 and SHDSL configuration screens appear in both CO
and CPE devices. In places where the screens that are not configurable the
screens are Read-only. For details see Chapter 4.
Note
Only TDM, SHDSL information can be configured and monitored via EOC.
Single IP
ASMi-54L can be fully managed via ASMi-54C/ETH or ASMi-54C/E1/ETH/N cards in
the LRS-102 or Megaplex-4100 chassis, using RADview-EMS with the Single IP
solution.
The Single IP solution uses one legal IP address (the LRS/MP CL module’s IP
address) to manage up to 96 standalone units via the chassis. The remote
standalone ASMi-54L is assigned a private IP address derived from the CL’s IP by
an internal algorithm. This solution saves IP addresses on the
LRS-102/Megaplex-4100 working with a remote standalone ASMi-54L.
This IP address is assigned to all the system which includes the LRS-102 (from
version 3.4) or Megaplex-4100 (from version 3.0) with its CL and ASMi-54C cards
and the remote standalone ASMi-54L units.
1-6
Overview
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Note
Chapter 1 Introduction
Single IP is introduced in version 2.6. Single IP does not apply if one of the
devices is of a lower version.
In the LRS-102 chassis, the IP mode must be set to Single IP.
When working in Single IP mode, RADview-EMS sends packets to the ASMi-54L
using the LRS-102 or Megaplex IP address. The LRS-102/Megaplex-4100 CL works
as NAPT router and routes the management packets to the appropriate entity.
Diagnostics
Real-time alarms provide information on the system status, indicating
management failure, synchronization loss, and other conditions.
ASMi-54L provides performance monitoring.
For the E1 interface, local and remote loopbacks are supported.
For OAM, connectivity monitoring and local and remote loopback tests are
supported.
Event Log File
The Event Log file includes entries from System, Ethernet, E1 and SHDSL
Interfaces.
Statistics
ASMi-54L provides statistics and counter capabilities in the physical Ethernet,
SHDSL and E1 levels.
Dying Gasp
Dying Gasp condition occurs if there is an interruption in the ASMi-54L power
source. ASMi-54L reports power failures to the specified network management
stations by sending an SNMP trap. This helps a service provider identify and
isolate the end-point device experienced a power failure.
1.2
New in this Version
ASMi-54L version 2.80 supports the following new features:
•
Ethernet traffic prioritization based on VLAN ID
•
Internal bridge Static and Learned MAC tables with VLAN ID in addition to MAC
address
•
Management traffic protection with the Access Control List (ACL).
These features:
•
Enhance ASMi-54L Ethernet traffic management ability adding new
prioritization and bridging tools
•
Secure the ASMi-54L management traffic.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
New in this Version
1-7
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.3
Installation and Operation Manual
Physical Description
ASMi-54L is a 1U high standalone device in a plastic or metal enclosure. LEDs and
connectors location is similar on the both enclosures. Figure 1-6 shows the
three-dimensional view of the ASMi-54L unit in a plastic enclosure. Figure 1-7
shows the three-dimensional view of the ASMi-54L unit in a metal enclosure.
Figure 1-6. ASMi-54L in a Plastic Enclosure
Figure 1-7. ASMi-54L in a Metal Enclosure
The front and rear panels are shown in Chapter 3.
Status LEDs are located on the front panel. In addition, E1 and Ethernet status
LEDs are located on the rear panel. The interfaces and connectors are located on
the rear panel. For more information, see Chapter 2.
ASMi-54L can be powered using a wide-range AC/DC (100-240 VAC, -48/-60 VDC
nominal) or -24 VDC power supply.
1.4
Functional Description
Interfaces
Flow Control and Autonegotiation
The Ethernet physical interface is 10/100BaseT supporting autonegotiation.
1-8
Functional Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
WAN Interface
The SHDSL interface complies with ITU-T G.991.2, ETSI 101524, and IEEE EFM
(IEEE802.3ah) standards for SHDSL.
Supervisory Port
The Control port connects directly to an ASCII terminal for managing the
ASMi-54L.
Ethernet Access (Bridge)
ASMi-54L has a multi-port bridging capability for handling up to six bridge ports.
The Bridge has two modes of operation:
•
VLAN-Aware
•
VLAN-Unaware.
In each mode, a series of five processes is executed:
Note
•
Ingress: Checks each frame entering the bridge to decide if and how this
frame should be passed on to the forwarding process
•
Learning: Learns new MAC table entries
User can also configure a static MAC address in Static MAC Table configuration
screen.
•
Aging: Checks the forwarding MAC table periodically
•
Forwarding: Decides to which bridge port/ports to forward the frame
•
Transmission (VLAN-Aware mode only): Selects the format of the transmitted
frame at the output port: with VLAN ID (tagged) or without VLAN ID
(untagged) or unmodified.
Bridge features and these five processes are described below for each mode.
VLAN-Aware Mode
This mode enables the creation of sub-groups of bridge ports within the bridge.
Each sub-group is defined per VLAN and is associated with a unique VLAN ID
(VID). Frames containing a VID can be forwarded only between bridge ports that
are members of this specific VLAN, enabling a total separation between different
VLAN users within the same bridge.
Bridge Features
•
Full VLAN-Aware bridge in accordance with 802.1Q
•
Learning and forwarding according to MAC address and VID
•
Learning of up to 1,024 MAC table entries
•
Static MAC table
•
Configuration of the aging time
•
MAC table viewing (learned MACs).
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Functional Description
1-9
Chapter 1 Introduction
Installation and Operation Manual
Ingress Process
The ingress process has three steps:
Frame Admission: Two modes of operation (configured per bridge port):

Admit All Frames: All frames arriving from the port are admitted and
proceed to the ingress filtering process. PVID is assigned to untagged or
priority-only tagged frames.

Admit Only VLAN Tagged Frames: Only VLAN tagged frames are admitted
and allowed to proceed to the ingress filtering process. Untagged or
priority-only tagged frames are discarded.
Ingress Filtering: Works in one of the following modes (configured per bridge
port):

Enable: Performs ingress filtering according to VIDs. Only frames that
share a VID assigned to this bridge port are admitted

Disable: All frames are forwarded.
Only admitted frames that pass filtering are submitted to learning and
forwarding processes.
PVID Assignment: Is configured per bridge port:

In VLAN-Aware mode, each received frame entering the bridge is
associated with a single VID. If the received frame does not contain a
VLAN ID (untagged or priority-only tagged frames), a specific PVID is
assigned to these frames before they pass to the forwarding process.

Accordingly, the untagged/priority tagged frames that have passed
admission/ingress filtering, are tagged with PVID and proceed to the
forwarding process. Tagged frames will be double tagged with the PVID
only if Tag Stacking is enabled.

For untagged frames that were tagged during this process to VID=PVID,
the priority tag is assigned at the VLAN priority field, according to the
default priority configuration.
Table 1-1 summarizes the behavior of the ingress process:
Table 1-1. Ingress Process
1-10
Frame Admission
Mode
Ingress
Filtering Mode
Bridge Behavior
Admit all frames
Enable
VLAN tagged frames with a VID (or PVID for
untagged/priority tagged frames) that do not
include the bridge port in their VLAN member
set, are dropped.
Disable
All frames pass.
Functional Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Frame Admission
Mode
Ingress
Filtering Mode
Bridge Behavior
Admit VLAN tagged
frames
Enable
VLAN tagged frames with a VID that do not
include the bridge port in their member set are
dropped. Untagged/priority-only tagged frames
are dropped.
Disable
All VLAN tagged frames pass.
Untagged/priority-only tagged frames are
dropped.
Frames that pass this stage are submitted to the forwarding and learning
processes.
Learning Process
The learning process observes the source MAC address (SA) of the received frame
and updates the forwarding database (FDB) with the MAC address and the bridge
port that the frame was received from. (FDB is also referred to as MAC table.)
Entries in the MAC table can be dynamic (inserted by the learning process) or
static (inserted by configuration). A dynamic entry has an aging time associated
with it.
The ASMi-54L VLAN-Aware bridge is a Shared VLAN Learning (SVL) bridge.
The learning process inserts a new dynamic entry into the MAC table. This entry
consists of a MAC-VID pair and bridge port.
•
If the MAC-VID pair already exists for the same port, the aging time is
updated.
•
If the MAC-VID pair already exists but for a different bridge port (dynamic
entry), the new entry overrides the existing one.
•
If the MAC-VID pair already exists for a different bridge port (static entry), the
static entry prevails.
Aging Process
The aging process checks the forwarding MAC table periodically. Each dynamic
entry-aging period that has exceeded the configured Aging Time Limit is deleted.
The aging period represents the time passed since the last frame for this entry
entered the bridge. The periodic check of the MAC table (aging time intervals)
results in the actual aging time, which can reach up to twice the value that was
configured by the user.
Forwarding Process
The forwarding process is performed based on the frame destination MAC-VID
pair. The frame is forwarded to the bridge port that was specified in the MAC
table for this MAC-VID pair entry.
Untagged frames are forwarded according to the PVID that was attached to the
frame during the ingress process.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Functional Description
1-11
Chapter 1 Introduction
Installation and Operation Manual
Frames are forwarded, dropped, or flooded according to the following guidelines:
•
Forwarded: If the bridge port of the pair entry (DA, VID) in the MAC table is
both an active bridge port and a member of the VLAN, the frame is forwarded
to that bridge port only.
•
Dropped:
•

If the bridge port for the pair entry (DA, VID) in the MAC table is the port
on which the frame was received, the frame is dropped.

If there are no active ports associated with the frame’s VID, or if the VID
is not defined at all, the frame is dropped.
Flooded:

If the pair (DA, VID) is not learned and does not exist in the MAC table,
the frame is transmitted to all bridge ports that are associated with the
frame’s VLAN ID.

Multicasts and broadcasts are flooded only through the bridge ports
whose VLAN ID is identical to the frame’s VLAN ID.
Transmission Process
After the forwarding process identifies the destination bridge port/ports to which
the frames must be transmitted, the frames are transmitted in the appropriate
format.
The frame format can be configured for each VLAN and port:
•
VLAN-tagged: In this mode:

VLAN-tagged frames are transmitted unchanged.

Untagged frames are transmitted tagged with priority according to the
default priority of the ingress bridge port, and VID=PVID of the port from
which they entered.

Priority-tagged frames are transmitted tagged with original priority and
VID = PVID.
•
Untagged: In this mode, all frames are transmitted as untagged
•
Unmodified: In this mode, all frames are transmitted unchanged.
VLAN-Unaware Mode
In this mode the bridge forwarding ignores the VLAN ID of VLAN-tagged frames.
Each Ethernet packet received from each bridge port is forwarded according to its
destination MAC address.
Bridge Features
Bridge features include:
1-12
•
Learning and forwarding according to MAC address only
•
Learning of up to 1024 MAC addresses
•
Static MAC table
•
Configuration of the aging time
Functional Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
•
VLAN tagged frames transparency (forwarding according to MAC only)
•
MAC table viewing (learned MACs).
Ingress Process
All frames are accepted in this mode: untagged, priority-tagged, or VLAN tagged.
Learning and forwarding is based on the MAC addresses, regardless of the VLAN.
This mode is also known as transparent mode.
Learning Process
The learning process observes the source MAC address (SA) of the received frame
and updates the forwarding database (FDB) with the MAC address and the bridge
port that the frame was received from. (FDB is also referred to as MAC table.)
The learning process inserts a new entry into the MAC table. This entry consists
of the MAC and bridge port:
•
If the MAC already exists for the same bridge port, the aging time will be
updated.
•
If the MAC already exists, but for a different bridge port, (dynamic entry) the
new entry will override the existing one.
Aging Process
The aging process checks the forwarding MAC table periodically. Each dynamic
entry aging time period that has exceeded the configured Aging Time Limit is
deleted. The aging time period is the period of time since the last frame for this
entry entered the bridge. The periodic check of the MAC table (aging time
intervals), results in an actual aging time that can reach up to twice the value that
was configured by the user.
Forwarding Process
The forwarding process is performed based on the frame MAC Destination
Address (MDA). The frame is forwarded to the bridge/port specified in the MAC
table for this MAC.
Frames are forwarded, dropped, or flooded at this stage:
•
Forwarded: A frame will be forwarded according to its DA, to the bridge port
where its DA was learned.
•
Dropped: If the port for that DA entry in the MAC table is the port on which
the frame was received, the frame will be dropped.
•
Flooded:

If there is no information regarding the DA in the MAC table, the frame is
flooded to all ports

Frames with multicast or broadcast addresses are flooded to all ports.
Transmission Process
In this bridge mode (VLAN-Unaware), the frames are transmitted unchanged (no
tags added or removed).
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Functional Description
1-13
Chapter 1 Introduction
Installation and Operation Manual
VLAN Stacking
VLAN Stacking mode for a bridge port refers to the addition of a tag to an
ingress/egress frame (regardless of whether it already has an existing VLAN tag).
This setting is independent of the bridge activity.
Note
The VLAN Stacking is supported only for egress frames and is possible only when
stripping is performing on ingress frames.
The Egress Tag Handling is read-only.
VLAN Stripping
VLAN Stripping mode for a bridge port refers to the removal of a tag from
ingress/egress frame.
This setting is independent of the bridge activity. Tag Stripping is supported only
for Ingress frames.
Quality of Service
ASMi-54L performs QoS mapping to priority queues (4 PQ, strict priority/WFQ)
per bridge port according to one of the following:
•
VLAN priority (802.1p)
•
DSCP (bits 0-5 in IP TOS byte)
•
Port based
•
VLAN ID based.
0
0
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
IP
HEADER
VERSION
IHL
TOTAL LENGTH
TOS
IDENTIFICATION
FLAGS
FRAGMENT OFFSET
TIME TO LIVE
PROTOCOL
HEADER CHECKSUM
SOURCE ADDRESS
DESTINATION ADDRESS
OPTIONS
PADDING
Figure 1-8. IP Header
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
DS5
DS4
DS3
DS2
DS1
DS0
XX
XX
DSCP: six bits (DS5–DS0)
Figure 1-9. ToS Byte DSCP Field
Management Functionality
ASMi-54L can be managed locally from an ASCII terminal, or from a remote site
using Telnet, or RAD’s Web-based application, or RADview, RAD’s Network
Management System.
1-14
Functional Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
For a description of ASCII terminal activation, including general instructions for
navigating through the system menus and windows, and modifying data, see
Chapter 3.
Inband Management
ASMi-54L can perform inband management via Telnet, a Web-based management
application, or an SNMP-based management system. Configuration, monitoring,
and statistics are available.
Management Access
The unit’s architecture allows access from every bridge port to both the host and
remote site devices. In certain configuration modes, a total separation of
management traffic from user traffic can be achieved.
VLAN-Based Management Scheme
In this scenario, traffic coming from the remote CPE uses two VLANs: one for user
traffic, for which the CPE may use tag stacking, and the other for management
traffic. All CPEs connected to the ASMi-54L share the same management VLAN.
In VLAN-Aware mode, ASMi-54L forwards the management traffic to the
management station in the Ethernet network. Because a different VLAN is used,
total separation between user traffic and management traffic is maintained.
Management Security
Access via ASCII terminal, Telnet or RAD’s Web-based application is passwordand ACL-protected.
The system logs out automatically and displays the login screen after 15 minutes
of inactivity (time during which no character was sent to the terminal/Telnet).
Each attempt to login (valid or invalid) to ASMi-54L results in sending
events/traps to the log file or NMS.
Two user access levels are supported:
•
su – super user, full read and write access
•
user – read-only.
An ACL (Access Control List) specifies which users or system processes are
granted access to the modem.
Statistics
ASMi-54L provides statistics and counters at the Ethernet, SHDSL, and E1 levels.
Event Log File
Events are stored and time stamped in an event log file. Up to 1,000 cyclic
entries are maintained. The log file is maintained for Ethernet, SHDSL, E1, and
the system. For more information, see Chapter 5.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Functional Description
1-15
Chapter 1 Introduction
Installation and Operation Manual
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
ASMi-54L provides several forms of diagnostic and troubleshooting procedures:
•
Monitoring the system performance
•
Displaying status and statistics
•
Displaying system messages
•
Displaying Events/Traps
Traps can be masked per manager IP address, upon user configuration.
•
Power failure report to the specified network management stations by
sending an SNMP trap (Dying Gasp).
•
Masking Alarms
Alarms can be masked per port
•
Troubleshooting the device
•
Performing connectivity tests

E1 local analog loopbacks (LLB)

E1 remote analog loopbacks (RLB)

OAM connectivity local and remote loopbacks.
For more information on diagnostics and troubleshooting, see Chapter 5.
1.5
SHDSL Line
Interface
Technical Specifications
Type
2/4-wire unconditioned dedicated line (twisted pair)
Line Coding
TC-PAM 16/32/64/128
Frame Size
2047 bytes
Line Rate
• For EFM: 192 to 15296 kbps with steps of n x 64 kbps
for each pair
• For HDLC: 192 to 8576 Mbps with steps of n x 64
where n = 134 for each pair
Range (26 AWG,
noise-free)
192 kbps – 6.6 km (4.1 miles)
1536 kbps – 4.9 km (3.0 miles)
2048 kbps – 4.5 km (2.8 miles)
4096 kbps – 3.2 km (2.0 miles)
4608 kbps – 3.0 km (1.9 miles)
5696 kbps – 2.6 km (1.6 miles)
11456 kbps – 1.2 km (0.7 miles)
1-16
Technical Specifications
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Extended Range
over DSL Line
License key for transmitting 11.4/15 Mbps over 1 pair or
up to 30 Mbps over 2 pairs (point-to-point only)
Impedance
135Ω
Connector
RJ-45
Pair A: pins 4,5, Pair B: pins 3,6
E1 Port
Standard
ITU-T G.991.2 , ETSI 101524
Protection
ITU-T K.21
SHDSL Reference
Clock
Clock Mode 1 or 2 – For E1+Ethernet user interfaces
Clock Mode 3a – For Ethernet user interface only
Data Rate
Up to 2048 kbps
Framing
Framed or unframed
E1 with CRC-4 per ITU-T G.706
E1 without CRC-4 bipolar violations (BPV)
Coding
HDB3
Line Impedance
• 120Ω, balanced
• 75Ω, unbalanced (via adapter cable)
Internal Bridge
Control Port
E1 Jitter
Performance
As per ITU G.823
Connector
RJ-45, balanced or two BNC, unbalanced (adapter cable)
Ports
Fast Ethernet (up to 4)
LAN Table
Up to 1,024 MAC addresses (learned)
Operation Mode
VLAN-Aware, VLAN-Unaware
Filtering and
Forwarding
Transparent or filter
Maximum Frame
Size
2047 bytes
Interface
V.24/RS-232
Type
DCE
Format
Asynchronous; 8 bits, 1 stop bit, no parity
Baud Rate
9.6, 19.2, 115.2 kbps
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Technical Specifications
1-17
Chapter 1 Introduction
Ethernet Ports
Installation and Operation Manual
Connector
9-pin, D-type female
Interface
10/100BaseT
Connectors
Four RJ-45
Max Ethernet
Frame Length
2047 bytes
Timing
Derived from three alternative sources:
• Internal oscillator (only CO unit)
• External, derived from the E1 interface (only CO unit)
• Receive, derived from the SHDSL received signal (only
CPE unit)
Monitoring
Statistics &
Performance
System and physical layer alarms
Monitoring
• Ethernet physical layer statistics and frame counters
• SHDSL performance and frame counters
• E1 statistics
Diagnostics
Loopbacks
(E1 port only)
ITU V.54:
• Local analog loopback
• Remote digital loopback
Indicators
(Front Panel)
PWR (green)
On: ASMi-54L is powered on
Off: ASMi-54L is off
TST (yellow)
On: A test is active
Off: No test is active
SHDSL SYNC
(green/red)
Green: the SHDSL line is synchronized and can pass data
Green flashing: the SHDSL line is in training process
Red flashing: the SHDSL line is in PAF/M-pair
establishment stage
Red: the SHDSL line is not synchronized, in
training process, or in PAF/M pair establishment stage
ALM (red)
On: A new alarm is detected in the alarm buffer
Off: No alarm currently detected
1-18
Technical Specifications
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Indicators
(Rear Panel)
Chapter 1 Introduction
Ethernet Ports
LINK/ACT
(green/yellow)
On (green): Ethernet port link is up
Off: No Ethernet link on the port
Blink (yellow): Ethernet traffic on the port
E1 Port
E1 LOC (red)
On: Loss of signal or sync loss (in framed mode only), or
unframed AIS is received on the E1 port
Off: Valid signal is received on the E1 port with no sync
loss and no unframed AIS
E1 REM (red)
On: Remote alarm is received on the E1 port
Off: No remote alarm is received on the E1 port
AC/DC Voltage
100-240 VAC, 48/60 VDC nominal
DC Voltage
24 VDC nominal
Power
Consumption
4 × Ethernet port + E1 port
2-wire: 7.5 W
4-wire: 8 W
Physical
Height
43.7 mm (1.7 in)
(plastic)
Width
220 mm (8.6 in)
Depth
170 mm (6.7 in)
Weight
0.6 kg (1.3 lb)
Physical
Height
43.7 mm (1.7 in)
(metal)
Width
215.5 mm (8.5 in)
Depth
153 mm (6.0 in)
Weight
0.7 kg (1.5 lb)
Temperature
0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F)
Extended
Temperature
-20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F)
Humidity
Up to 90%, non-condensing
Power Source
Environment
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Technical Specifications
1-19
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-20
Technical Specifications
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Chapter 2
Installation and Setup
This chapter includes the following topics:
•
Site requirements and prerequisites
•
Package contents
•
Equipment needed
•
Installation and setup.
ASMi-54L is delivered completely assembled, and is factory set for basic
operation. It is designed for installation as a desktop unit.
After installing the unit, use an ASCII terminal connected to the CONTROL port to
perform any configuration necessary. The configuration procedures are described
in Chapter 3 and Chapter 4.
If problems are encountered, refer to Chapter 6.
Warning
Note
No internal settings, adjustment, maintenance and repairs should be performed
by either the operator or the user. Such activities must be performed only by
skilled personnel who are aware of the hazards involved.
Always observe standard safety precautions during installation, operation, and
maintenance of this product.
Before installing the product, review Handling Energized Products at the
beginning of the manual.
2.1
Site Requirements and Prerequisites
Install AC-powered ASMi-54L units within 1.5m (5 feet) of an easily accessible
grounded AC outlet capable of furnishing the required supply voltage, in the
range of 100 to 240 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz.
DC-powered ASMi-54L units require a 48 (or 24) VDC power source, which must
be adequately isolated from the main supply.
Allow at least 90 cm (36 in) of frontal clearance for operator access. For
continuous product operation allow at least 10 cm of frontal clearance and at
least 15 cm at rear of the unit, for cable connections and ventilation. For proper
ventilation, keep at least 2.5 cm clearance from the sides and top of the product.
The ambient operating temperature is 0°–50°C (32°–122°F), at a relative
humidity of up to 90%, non-condensing.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Site Requirements and Prerequisites
2-1
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup
2.2
Installation and Operation Manual
Package Contents
The package contains the following items:
•
One ASMi-54L unit
•
AC power cord or DC adaptor connector
•
RM-33-2 kit
•
Technical documentation CD.
2.3
Required Equipment
Hand Tools and Kits
ASMi-54L needs no special tools for installation.
Cables
ASMi-54L comes equipped with an appropriate (country or region dependent)
power cord to be connected from the power socket on the rear panel to the
mains.
Refer to the following table to determine what cables and connectors are
required for installation. For all connector pinouts, refer to Appendix A.
Table 2-1. Required Connection Media
Interface
Cable/Connector
Control port
Straight RS-232/V.24 cable with DB-9 female connector
for ASCII terminal
Fast Ethernet interface
RJ-45, 8-pin connection media
SHDSL Interface
RJ-45, 8-pin connection media
E1
RJ-45, 8-pin connection media
2.4
Mounting ASMi-54L
ASMi-54L is designed for installation as a desktop unit. Place and secure the unit
on a stable, non-movable surface.
Refer to the clearance and temperature requirements in Site Requirements and
Prerequisites.
2-2
Mounting ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
2.5
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup
Rear Panel Interface Options
Figure 2-1 – Figure 2-4 show the rear panel interface options for ASMi-54L in the
plastic and metal enclosures.
Figure 2-1. ASMi-54L with AC/DC Power Supply and E1 Port
Figure 2-2. ASMi-54L with AC/DC Power Supply without E1 Port
Figure 2-3. ASMi-54L with 24VDC Power Supply and E1 Port
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Rear Panel Interface Options
2-3
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup
Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 2-4. ASMi-54L with 24VDC Power Supply without E1 Port
2.6
Connecting to Ethernet Equipment
The ASMi-54L Fast Ethernet interfaces terminate in 1–4 8-pin RJ-45 connectors
designated for 10/100BaseT Ethernet ports (see Figure 2-5).
Refer to Appendix A for the RJ-45 connector pinouts.
Figure 2-5. Four RJ-45 ETH Connectors

To connect the Fast Ethernet interface:
•
Connect the LAN to an RJ-45 connector designated ETH.
2.7
Connecting to E1 Equipment
The ASMi-54L E1 interface terminates in an 8-pin RJ-45 connector designated E1
(see Figure 2-6).
Note
The E1 interface is available depending on the ordering option.
Refer to Appendix A for the RJ-45 connector pinouts.
2-4
Connecting to E1 Equipment
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup
Figure 2-6. E1 Balanced Connector

To connect to a balanced E1 interface:
•

Connect the E1 to the RJ-45 connector designated E1.
To connect to an unbalanced E1 interface:
•
Connect the optional adaptor cable CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1 to the RJ-45 connector
designated E1.
•
Connect the coax connectors of the adaptor cable to the coax connectors of
the unbalanced E1 line.
2.8
Connecting to SHDSL Equipment
The SHDSL two-wire interface terminates in an 8-pin RJ-45 connector designated
SHDSL (see Figure 2-7). Refer to Appendix A for the RJ-45 connector pinouts.
Figure 2-7. SHDSL Two-Wire Connector

To connect the SHDSL interface:
•
Connect an SHDSL line to an RJ-45 connector designated SHDSL.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Connecting to SHDSL Equipment
2-5
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup
2.9
Installation and Operation Manual
Connecting to an ASCII Terminal
ASMi-54L is connected to an ASCII terminal via a 9-pin D-type female connector
designated CONTROL–DCE (see Figure 2-8). Refer to Appendix A for the
connector pinout.
Figure 2-8. CONTROL–DCE Connector

To connect to an ASCII terminal:
1. Connect the male 9-pin D-type connector of straight RS-232 cable to the
CONTROL–DCE connector.
2. Connect the other connector of the RS-232 cable to an ASCII terminal.
Caution Terminal cables must have a frame ground connection. Use ungrounded cables
when connecting a supervisory terminal to a DC-powered unit with floating
ground. Using improper terminal cable may result in damage to supervisory
terminal port.
2.10 Connecting to Power
ASMi-54L provides two of power supply options:
2-6
•
A dual input AC/DC power supply. AC or DC power is supplied to ASMi-54L via
a standard 3-prong power input connector on the rear panel (see Figure 2-9).
•
DC power supply. DC power is supplied to ASMi-54L via a special DC power
cable provided with the unit (see Figure 2-10).
Connecting to Power
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup
Figure 2-9. AC/DC Power Input Connector
Figure 2-10. DC Power Input Connector
To connect power to ASMi-54L, refer to the appropriate section below,
depending on your input power supply (AC or DC).
Warning
Before connecting this unit to a power source and connecting or disconnecting
any other cable, the protective ground terminals of this unit must be connected
to the protective ground conductor of the mains (AC or DC) power cord. If you
are using an extension cord (power cable) make sure it is grounded as well.
Any interruption of the protective (grounding) conductor (inside or outside the
instrument) or disconnecting of the protective ground terminal can make this
unit dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
Note
Refer also to the sections describing connections of AC and DC mains at the
beginning of the manual.
Connecting AC Power
AC power should be supplied through the 1.5m (5 ft) standard power cable
terminated by a standard 3-prong plug. The cable is provided with the unit.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Connecting to Power
2-7
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Installation and Operation Manual
To connect AC power:
1. Connect the power cable to the power connector on the ASMi-54L rear panel.
2. Connect the power cable to the mains outlet.
The unit turns on automatically upon connection to the mains.
Connecting DC Power
Connecting DC Power via a Dual AC/DC Power Input Connector
A DC adaptor for the 48 VDC power connection is supplied with the unit. When
the 24 VDC power supply is ordered, a special Terminal Block (TB) connector plug
is supplied.

To connect DC power supply via a dual AC/DC power input connector:
•
Refer to the DC power supply connection supplement for instructions on how
to wire the DC cables. The DC supplement is provided at the end of the
manual.
•
The DC input is floating. Either pole can be externally grounded.
Connecting DC Power via a DC Power Input Connector
A DC adaptor for the -24 VDC power connection is supplied with the unit.

To connect DC power via a DC power input connector:
Refer to the DC power supply connection supplement for instructions on how to
wire the DC adapters. The DC supplement is provided at the end of the manual.
1. Connect the DC power cable to the power connector on the ASMi-54L rear
panel.
2. Connect the power cable to the DC power source.
The unit turns on automatically upon connection to the power.
2-8
Connecting to Power
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Chapter 3
Operation
This chapter provides the following information for ASMi-54L:
•
Power-on and power-off procedures
•
Detailed description of the controls and indicators and their functions
•
Instructions for using a terminal connected to the ASMi-54L control port
•
How to navigate menus
•
Description of the configuration alternatives.
For a detailed explanation of parameters on the menus, see Chapter 4.
The installation procedures given in Chapter 2 must be completed and checked
before attempting to operate the ASMi-54L.
3.1

Turning On the Unit
To turn on the ASMi-54L unit:
•
Connect the power cord to the mains.
The PWR indicator lights up (green) and remains lit as long as ASMi-54L
receives power.
Once installed, ASMi-54L requires no operator attention except for occasional
monitoring of front panel indicators. Intervention is needed only when configuring
the unit for operational requirements, or when performing diagnostic tests.
3.2
Indicators
The ASMi-54L LEDs are located on the front and rear panels.
Front Panel Indicators
Figure 3-1 shows the typical front panel. Table 3-1 describes the functionality of
the ASMi-54L front panel LEDs.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Indicators
3-1
Chapter 3 Operation
Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 3-1. ASMi-54L Front Panel
Table 3-1. ASMi-54L Front Panel LEDs
Name
Color
Function
PWR
Green
On: ASMi-54L is powered on
Off: ASMi-54L is off
TST
Yellow
On: A test is active
Off: No test is active
ALM
Red
On: Alarm is active
Off: No alarm
SHDSL SYNC
Green/Red
Green: the SHDSL line is synchronized and can pass data
Green flashing: the SHDSL line is in training process
Red flashing: the SHDSL line is in PAF/M-pair
establishment stage
Red: the SHDSL line is not synchronized, in training
process or in PAF/M-pair establishment stage
Rear Panel Indicators
Figure 3-2 and Figure 3-3 show the options for the rear panel of an
AC/DC-powered ASMi-54L unit. Figure 3-4 and Figure 3-5 show the options for
the rear panel of a DC-powered ASMi-54L unit. Table 3-2 lists the functions of
the LED indicators on the rear panel.
3-2
Indicators
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Figure 3-2. ASMi-54L with One E1 and Four Ethernet Ports (AC/DC Power Supply)
Figure 3-3. ASMi-54L with Four Ethernet Ports, without E1 (AC/DC Power Supply)
Figure 3-4. ASMi-54L with One E1 and Four Ethernet Ports (24 VDC Power Supply)
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Indicators
3-3
Chapter 3 Operation
Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 3-5. ASMi-54L with Four Ethernet Ports, without E1 (24 VDC Power Supply)
Table 3-2. ASMi-54L Rear Panel LEDs
Port
Name
Color
Function
Ethernet Ports
ACT for each Ethernet port
Yellow
Blinks according to Ethernet traffic.
LINK for each Ethernet port
Green
On: Ethernet link is up
Off: Ethernet link is down
E1 Port
LOC
Red
On: Loss of signal or sync loss (in framed
mode only), or unframed AIS is received on
the E1 port
Off: Valid signal is received on the E1 port
with no sync loss and no unframed AIS
REM
Red
On: Remote alarm is received on the E1 port
Off: No remote alarm is received on the E1
port
3.3
Default Settings
Table 3-3 lists the default settings of the ASMi-54L configuration parameters.
Table 3-3. Default System Settings
Parameter
Default Value
Menu Path
Manual
Chapter
Administrative
Status (E1)
Down
Configuration>Physical Layer>E1
Chapter 4
Administrative
Status (Ethernet)
Up
Configuration>Physical Layer>Ethernet
Chapter 4
Administrative
Up
Monitoring>Physical Layer>SHDSL> Status>PCS
Chapter 5
3-4
Default Settings
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Chapter 3 Operation
Default Value
Menu Path
Manual
Chapter
Administrative
Status (SHDSL)
Up
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL> Line
Chapter 4
Aging Time
300
Configuration>Applications>Bridge
Chapter 4
Alarm (E1)
Unmasked
Configuration>Physical Layer>E1
Chapter 4
Alarm (Ethernet)
Unmasked
Configuration>Physical Layer>Ethernet
Chapter 4
Alarm (SHDSL)
Unmasked
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL
Chapter 4
Auto Negotiation
Enable
Configuration>Physical Layer>Ethernet
Chapter 4
Baud Rate
115.200 kbps
Configuration>System>Terminal>Baud rate
Chapter 4
Clock Source
(Device with E1
interface)
Internal
Configuration>System>Clock>Master clock
Chapter 4
Contact
Name of the
contact person
Configuration>System> Management>Device Info
Chapter 4
Current Margin
7 dB
Configuration>Physical Layer> SHDSL>Line
Chapter 4
Default gateway
0.0.0.0
Configuration>System> Management>Host
Chapter 4
Description
ASMi-54L, HW
and SW version
according to the
product version
Configuration>System> Management>Device
information
Chapter 4
DHCP
Enable
Configuration>System>Management>Host>DHCP
Chapter 4
Fault Propagation
Disable
Configuration>System>Fault Propagation>Network
User Fault Propagation
Chapter 4
Flow Control
Disable
Configuration>Physical Layer>Ethernet
Chapter 4
Ingress Rate
Limit (Kbps)
100000
Configuration>Physical Layer>Ethernet
Chapter 4
Rate Limit Packet
Types
All
Configuration>Physical Layer>Ethernet
Chapter 4
Forwarding Mode
Filter
Configuration>Applications>Bridge
Chapter 4
Host Priority Tag
0
Configuration>System>
Management>Host>Encapsulation
Chapter 4
Host Tagging
Untagged
Configuration>System>
Management>Host>Encapsulation
Chapter 4
Host VLAN ID
-
Configuration>System>
Management>Host>Encapsulation
Chapter 4
Idle Code
7C
Configuration>Physical Layer>E1
Chapter 4
Interface Type
Balance
Configuration>Physical Layer>E1
Chapter 4
Status (PCS)
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Default Settings
3-5
Chapter 3 Operation
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Default Value
Menu Path
Manual
Chapter
IP address
0.0.0.0
Configuration>System>Management> Host
Chapter 4
Line probe
Enable
Configuration> Physical Layer>SHDSL> Line
Chapter 4
Link Type
Framed G.732N
Configuration>Physical Layer>E1
Chapter 4
Location
Location of the
Device
Configuration>System>Management> Device Info
Chapter 4
Loop Attenuation
Threshold
0
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Line
Chapter 4
Mask
255.255.255.0
Configuration>System> Management>Host
Chapter 4
Max Capability
Advertised
100BaseTX fullduplex
Configuration>Physical Layer>Ethernet
Chapter 4
MDIX Cross Over
Enable
Configuration>Physical Layer>Ethernet
Chapter 4
Name
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Management> Device Info
Chapter 4
New Password
Empty string
Configuration>System>Management> Management
Access>User Access>Change Password
Chapter 4
OAM Descriptor
Number
511
Configuration> Physical Layer>SHDSL>Link
OAM>Link OAM Descriptors
Chapter 4
OAM Loopback
Rx
Ignore
Configuration> Physical Layer>SHDSL>Link
OAM>Link OAM Descriptors
Chapter 4
OAM Mode
Active
Configuration> Physical Layer>SHDSL>Link
OAM>Link OAM Descriptors
Chapter 4
OAM Rate Limit
10
Configuration> Physical Layer>SHDSL>Link
OAM>Link OAM Descriptors
Chapter 4
Old Password
1234
Configuration>System>Management>Management
Access> User Access
Chapter 4
PCS
1
Monitoring>Physical layer>SHDSL> Status>PCS
Chapter 5
Power Backoff
0
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Line
Chapter 4
QoS Priority
Classification
802.1p
Configuration>Applications>QoS>Priority
Classification
Chapter 4
Rate
192
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Line
Chapter 4
Read Community
Public
Configuration>System>Management>Host
Chapter 4
Rx Sensitivity
Short Haul
Configuration>Physical Layer>E1
Chapter 4
SHDSL
Transmission
Mode
AnnexB/G
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Line
Chapter 4
SNMP Access
Enable
Configuration>System>Management>Management
Access
Chapter 4
SNR Margin
0
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL> Line
Chapter 4
3-6
Default Settings
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Chapter 3 Operation
Default Value
Menu Path
Manual
Chapter
STU
Remote
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Line
Chapter 4
TC Layer
64-65 octet
(EFM)
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Line
Chapter 4
TS0
Transparent
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL> Internal DS1
Chapter 4
Time Slot
Assignment
TS1 – Data
TS2–TS31 – NC
Main Menu>Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>
Internal DS1>TS Assignment
Chapter 4
Telnet Access
Enable
Configuration>System>Management> Management
Access
Chapter 4
Trap Community
Public
Configuration> System>Management>Host
Chapter 4
User Name
user; su
Configuration> System>Management>
Management Access>User Access
Chapter 4
VLAN Mode
Unaware
Configuration>Applications>Bridge
Chapter 4
Web Access
Enable
System> Management>Management Access
Chapter 4
Worst Margin
Disable
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Line
Chapter 4
Write Community
Private
Configuration>System>Management>Host
Chapter 4
Threshold
3.4
Configuration and Management Alternatives
Configuration and monitoring operations are performed locally from an ASCII
terminal connected to the control port, or from a Web-based application, or via
SNMP.
Working with Terminal
ASMi-54L includes a V.24/RS-232 asynchronous DCE port designated CONTROL,
which is terminated in a 9-pin D-type female connector. The control port
continuously monitors the incoming data stream and immediately responds to
any input string received through this port.
The control port can be configured to communicate at the following rates: 9.6,
19.2, or 115.2 kbps.

To start a terminal control session:
1. Make sure all ASMi-54L cables and connectors are properly connected.
2. Turn on the control terminal or start the PC terminal emulation (in
Windows XP: click Start>All Programs>Accessories>Communications>
HyperTerminal to create a new terminal connection.
The Connection Description dialog box is displayed.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuration and Management Alternatives
3-7
Chapter 3 Operation
Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 3-6. Windows HyperTerminal, Connection Description Dialog Box
Note
If the terminal connection is already created, proceed directly to step 6.
3. Enter a description for the terminal connection.
4. Select an icon to represent the terminal connection.
The Connect To dialog box is displayed.
Figure 3-7. Connect To Dialog Box
5. Select a PC COM port to be used for communication with ASMi-54L.
The COM Properties dialog box is displayed.
3-8
Configuration and Management Alternatives
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Figure 3-8. COM1 Properties Dialog Box
6. Configure the communication port parameters to a baud rate of 115,200 bps,
8 bits/character, 1 stop bit, no parity, and no flow control.
The main HyperTerminal window is displayed.
7. Set the terminal emulator to VT100 emulation for optimal view of system
menus (File>Properties>Settings).
8. Set the terminal emulator to view a 132-character screen width (Properties>
Settings>Terminal Setup>132 column mode).
Login
To prevent unauthorized modification of the operating parameters, ASMi-54L has
two access levels:
Note

•
Superuser can perform all the functions provided by the ASMi-54L
management facility, including defining new users.
•
User mode for monitoring and configuration view only.
It is recommended to change default passwords to prevent unauthorized access
to the unit.
To enter as a superuser:
1. Enter su for user name.
2. Enter 1234 for password.
The Main menu is displayed.
This allows you to configure all the parameters of ASMi-54L, and to change the
su and user passwords.

To enter as a user:
1. Enter user for user name.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuration and Management Alternatives
3-9
Chapter 3 Operation
Installation and Operation Manual
2. Enter 1234 for password.
The Main menu is displayed.
Note
If an invalid password is used three times consecutively, the system becomes
inaccessible for 15 minutes.
Choosing Options

To choose an option:
1. Press the number corresponding to the option, and press <Enter>.
2. Press <S> to save your changes.
ASMi-54L updates its database with a new value or displays a new menu for
the selected option.
3. If you press <ESC> to exit the menu without saving your changes, the
following message appears:
“Do you want to save changes (Y/N/C)?”
Press the appropriate letter to save or discard your changes (Yes/No/Cancel).
Note
When a menu option has only two values, typing the option number and pressing
<Enter> toggles between the available values.
Screen Example
The following figure shows a typical screen with main items displayed.
Product title line (ASMi-54L)
Short message
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Sub Menu>
Sub Menu>
Parameter X [Range] …… (value)
Parameter Y>
(Select value from the list)
Table Z []
prompt>
Main>Configuration>System>
Help line message
Help line of keyboard shortcuts, such as “Esc-prev” for
returning to the previous menu
-----------Division screen line -----------------Scroll messages
Figure 3-9. Sample Screen
3-10
Configuration and Management Alternatives
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Navigating Tables
Some of the management screens contain tables that are wider than regular
menus and may require scrolling to reach all the parameters. These screens are
best viewed when your terminal screen is set to 132 character width.
Use the following keys (case-sensitive) for table navigation:
Table 3-4. Table Navigation Keys
Note
Key
Navigation
<Ctrl>+L
Move left
Left Arrow
Move left
Ctrl>+R
Move right
Right Arrow
Move right
<Ctrl>+U
Move up
Up Arrow
Move up
<Ctrl>+D
Move down
Down Arrow
Move down
<Tab>
Select the next changeable cell
G<row number>, <col number>
Go to the specified cell
You can display these navigation keys by typing <?> from a table.
The “A – Add ; R – Remove ; C – Clear” line appears when at least one entry is
configured. If the table is empty, only “A - Add” is displayed.
ASMi-54L
Main Menu>Configuration>Applications>Bridge>Static MAC table
MAC address
1
| 2
v 3
4
5
Receive Bridge port
11-11-11-11-11-11
22-22-22-22-22-22
33-33-33-33-33-33
44-44-44-44-44-44
55-55-55-55-55-55
1
2
3
3
5
1. MAC address … (11-11-11-11-11-11)
A – Add; R – Remove; C – Clear
ESC-Previous menu; !-Main menu; &-Exit; ?-Help
Figure 3-10. Sample Table Screen (Static MAC Table)
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuration and Management Alternatives
3-11
Chapter 3 Operation
Installation and Operation Manual
Help Screen Example
The following figure shows a typical Help screen, which summarizes the keyboard
shortcuts that are available in the functional screen from which the Help screen
was invoked.
The Help screen is invoked by pressing SHIFT-/ (the ‘?’ symbol) from the relevant
functional screen. However, not all functional screens have Help available.
Table Hot Keys
'L'
'd'
'a'
'm'
'c'
TAB
-
move left
scroll down
'D' - move down
add row
't' - remove row
represent entry as menu
clear table
select next changeable cell
S <row number>,<col number> - select cell
Figure 3-11. Typical Help Screen
Ending a Terminal Configuration Session

To end the current terminal session:
•
Type & (press Shift+7 on the keyboard).
After a session is ended, you must again enter a valid user name and password
to start a new session.
Working with RAD’s Web-based Management Application
RAD’s Web-based management application is a Web-based remote access
terminal management software. It provides a user-friendly interface for
configuring, collecting statistics and performing diagnostic tests on the unit.
Web Browser Requirements
The following Web browsers can be used to access the ASMi-54L supervision
utility from any location using Internet protocols.
•
Internet Explorer version 6.0 and up, running on Windows™
•
Firefox version 1.0.4 and up, running on Windows™
•
Mozilla version 1.4.3 and up, running on Unix.
When using a Web browser, be sure to do the following:
3-12
•
Enable scripts
•
Configure the firewall (if installed on your PC) to allow access to the
destination IP address
Configuration and Management Alternatives
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
•
Disable pop-up blocking software (such as Google Popup Blocker); you may
also need to configure your spyware/adware protection program to accept
traffic from/to the destination IP address
•
Browsers store the last viewed pages in a special cache. To prevent
configuration errors, you must flush the browser’s cache whenever you
return to the same screen.
Logging In

To log in via Web browser:
1. Connect the Ethernet port to the LAN.
2. Open the Web browser.
3. Disable any pop-up blocking software, such as Google Popup Blocker.
4. Enter the IP address of the ASMi-54L in the address field of the browser in
the following format: http://’IP address’ (‘IP address’ stands for the actual
ASMi-54L IP address which has to be assigned via an ASCII terminal).
5. Press <Enter> to instruct the browser to connect.
6. After the opening window appears, click LOGIN.
The Login window is displayed.
7. In the Login window, enter your user name (read/write user default is su) and
password (default is 1234).
The RAD’s management application Main menu is displayed.
8. Use standard browser operating procedures to perform the required tasks.
Note
• It is recommended to change default passwords to prevent unauthorized
access to the unit.
• ASMi-54L allows six management sessions, such as network sessions (Telnet,
RAD’s Web-based management application), or ASCII terminal sessions, to be
active simultaneously.
• If no user input is detected for 5 minutes during a management session,
ASMi-54L automatically disconnects from the management station.
Navigating the Web-based Management Application Menus
At the left-hand bottom corner, the RAD’s Web-based management application
provides auxiliary management tools:

•
Status – shows the number of users currently managing the unit.
•
Trace – opens an additional pane for system messages, progress indicators
(ping, software and configuration file downloads) and alarms.
•
Refresh All – refreshes the data currently displayed.
To choose an option:
1. Click a link in the management application screen to display the next menu.
2. Once the target screen is displayed, select a value from the drop-down box or
enter it in a text box.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuration and Management Alternatives
3-13
Chapter 3 Operation
Installation and Operation Manual
Working with RADview
RADview is an easy-to-use SNMP-based element management system (EMS) for
planning, provisioning and managing heterogeneous networks. RADview provides
a dedicated graphical user interface (GUI) for monitoring RAD products via their
SNMP agents.
For more information about this network management software, and for detailed
instructions on how to install, set up and use RADview, contact your local partner
or refer to the RADview User Manual, located on the Technical Documentation CD
or RAD's website.
Menu Map
Use the menu maps on the following pages as a reference aid when performing
configuration and control functions. Chapter 4 illustrates menus and explains
parameters. Table 3-3 lists default values.
3-14
Configuration and Management Alternatives
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Main Menu
2. Configuration
1. Inventory
3. Monitoring
4. Diagnostics
5. Utilities
E1
File Transfer
Loop
TFTP
Disable
Page 3
Page 2
Transfer Status
Local
Transfer Error
Remote
Command
Time Out (0...3600)
SW Download
Repeaters
SW Download & Reset
Loop
SW Upload
Disable
Cfg Download
Enable
Cfg Upload
Time Out (0...3600)
License Download
Local User File Name
Remote File Name
Server IP
TFTP Total Timeout
X-Modem
Transfer Status
Command
SW Download
SW Download & Reset
SW Upload
Cfg Download
Cfg Upload
License Download
Local User File Name
Show Statistics
Clear Statistics
License Management
Feature Status
Reset Device
Reset PCS
Figure 3-12. Main Menu Map
Main Menu
1. Inventory
2. Configuration
System
3. Monitoring
4. Diagnostics
5. Utilities
Application
Physical Layer
MAC Address
Bridge
View MAC Table
System UpTime
Link OAM
System Date
System Time
Page 5
Status
Status
Interface Status
Event Log
Date and Time
Page 6
Figure 3-13. Monitoring Menu Map – Page 2
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuration and Management Alternatives
3-15
Chapter 3 Operation
Installation and Operation Manual
Main Menu
1. Inventory
2. Configuration
System
3. Monitoring
4. Diagnostics
5. Utilities
Applications
Physical Layer
Ethernet
Management
Bridge
Port
VLAN Mode
Description
Administrative Status
Forwarding Mode
Name
Auto Negotiation
Aging Time (sec)
Location
Flow Control
Static MAC Table
Contact
Max Capability Advertised
Device Information
Host
IP Address
MAC Address
Ingress Rate Limit (Kbps)
Receive Bridge Port
Mask
Rate Limit Packet Types
Default Gateway
Alarms
Read Community
VLAN ID
MDIX Cross Over
Bridge Port
Bridge Port Number
E1
Bind
Write Community
E1 Port Number
Trap Community
Administrative Status
DHCP
Interface Type
Fast Ethernet [Number]
PCS [Number]
Egress Tag Handling
Activation
DHCP
Line Type
DHCP Status
Idle Code
Encapsulation
Host Tagging
Host VLAN ID
Host Priority Tag
Managers List
Ingress Filtering
Accept Frame Type
Rx Sensitivity
User Name
Port VID \ Staking VID [1
– 4094]
Alarms
Copy Origin Priority
Default Priority Tag [0-7]
SHDSL
Ingress Tag Handling
Line
TPID (Ether type) [0 – ffff]
Manager ID
Line
Manager IP
Wire Mode
Manager Trap Mask
TC Layer
VLAN ID
Clock Mode
Egress Tagged Ports
Administrative Status
Egress Untagged Ports
Management Access
User Access
VLAN Membership
User Level
STU
User Name
Power Backoff [0-31]
Old Password
Transmission Mode
New Password
Line Probe
802.1p
Confirm New Password
Payload Rate (Kbps)
DSCP
Current/Worst Margin
Per Port
Telnet Access
Egress Unmodified Ports
QoS
Priority Classification
-10 dB
…
21 dB
SNMP Access
WEB Access
Terminal
Per VLAN ID
Priority Mapping
802.1p
Clock Mode
Loop Attenuation
Threshold
SNR Margin Threshold
(dB)
Baud Rate
9600 bps
19200 bps
115200 bps
User Priority 0
…
User Priority 7
DSCP
Alarms
Fault Propagation
Tag Value 0
…
Tag Value 64
Repeaters
Network Fault Propagation
Network Power Backoff
Customer Power Backoff
Network Soft Restart
Customer Soft Restart
User Fault Propagation
Date and Time
System Date
Traffic Class
Per Port
PCS
System Time
Bridge Port 1
Broadcast Mode
Lines
Poll Interval (min)
[1 – 1440]
Administrative Status
Traffic Class
Scheduling Mode
Internal DS1
UTC Offset [-12 … +13]
E1 Port Number
NTP Servers
Time Slot Assignment
Factory Defaults
Factory Defaults w/o
Management
TS1
…
TS31
Full
Clear
WFQ
SP
Page 4
TS0 Mode
Figure 3-14. Configuration Menu Map – Page 3
3-16
Configuration and Management Alternatives
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Main Menu
1. Inventory
2. Configuration
3. Monitoring
Physical Layer
System
Ethernet
4. Diagnostics
5. Utilities
Applications
Link OAM
Link OAM Descriptors
E1
Page 3
SHDSL
OAM Loopback Rx
Descriptor Number
Line
PCS
OAM Mode
Internal DS1
OAM Rate Limit [1 – 100]
Link OAM Parameters
SHDSL Port
OAM Status
Descriptor Number
Page 3
Figure 3-15. Configuration Menu Map – Page 4
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuration and Management Alternatives
3-17
Chapter 3 Operation
Installation and Operation Manual
Main Menu
3. Monitoring
2. Configuration
1. Inventory
System
4. Diagnostics
Physical Layer
5. Utilities
Application
Page 2
Ethernet
Page 2
E1
SHDSL
Status
Status
Port
Administrative Status
Administrative Status
Operational Status
Statistics
Operation Status
Current Interval
Speed & Duplex
Status
Statistics
Line
Line
Wire
Admin Status
Wire
Current Interval
Port
Operational Status
Line
ES
SHDSL Mode
ES
Port
SES
PSD Mask
UAS
Rx Total Frames
UAS
SHDSL Transmission Mode
SES
Rx Total Octets
BES
Wiring
LOSWS
Rx Correct Frames
LOFC
TC Layer
CRC Anomalies
Rx FCS Error
CSS
Payload Rate
Elapsed Time
Rx Jabber Errors
Current timer
State
Number of 15 Min Intervals
Rx Fragment Errors
Number of 15 Min Intervals
Current SNR Margin
Flow Control
Statistics
15 Min Interval
Rx Pause Frames
Current Loop Attenuation
Current Power Backoff
Number of 1 Day Intervals
15 Min Interval
Rx Undersized Errors
Port
Rx Oversized Errors
Interval Number
Rx Discard Frames
ES
Admin Status
Interval Number
Rx Errors
SES
Operational Status
ES
Rx Unicast Frames
UAS
Lines
UAS
Rx MultiCast Frames
BES
SES
LOFC
LOSWS
CSS
CRC Anomalies
Rx Broadcast Frames
In 64 Octets
PCS
Choose interval number
In 65-127 Octets
Current Day Interval
In 128-255 Octets
Wire
Choise Interval Number
Current Day Interval
Port
Line
ES
ES
SES
UAS
UAS
SES
BES
LOSWS
LOFC
CRC Anomalies
CSS
Elapsed Time
In 256-511 Octets
In 512-1023 Octets
Line
In 1024-long Octets
Tx Total Frames
Tx Total Octets
Tx Correct Frames
Tx Collision
Number 1 Day Intervals
Tx Discard Frames
Day Intervals
Tx Unicast Frames
Line
Tx MultiCast Frames
Interval Number
Tx Broadcast Frames
ES
UAS
SES
LOSWS
CRC Anomalies
Accumulated Data
Line
Wire
ES
UAS
SES
LOSWS
CRC Anomalies
Accumulated Time
PCS/HDLC
TX Total Frames
RX Total Frames
TX Total Errors
Figure 3-16. Monitoring Menu Map – Page 5
3-18
Configuration and Management Alternatives
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Main Menu
1. Inventory
3. Monitoring
2. Configuration
4. Diagnostics
Physical Layer
System
5. Utilities
Application
Page 2
Page 2
Ethernet
SHDSL
E1
Status
Page 5
Page 5
Page 5
Statistics
Link OAM
Status
SHDSL Port Number
Page 5
Operational Status
Loopback Status
Local Information
MAC Address
OAM Mode
Undirectional Support
Vars Retrieval
Link Events
Loopback
PDU Size
Remote Information
MAC Address
OAM Mode
Undirectional Support
Vars Retrieval
Link Events
Loopback
PDU Size
Vendor OUI
Statistics
Port Number [1-N]
Port OAM Mode
Passive
Active
Link OAM Version
RX Information
RX Var Request
Rx Var Response
Rx Loopback Ctrl
Rx Event Notification
Rx Org Specific
Rx Unrecognized
Tx Information
Tx Var Request
Tx Var Response
Tx Loopback Ctrl
Tx Event Notification
Tx Org Specific
Figure 3-17. Monitoring Menu Map – Page 6
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuration and Management Alternatives
3-19
Chapter 3 Operation
Installation and Operation Manual
The main menu provides access to the following functions:
Inventory
Display logistics information on the ASMi-54L. See Chapter 4
for details.
Configuration
Configure ASMi-54L operational parameters, and manage its
database files. See Chapter 4 for details.
Monitoring
Display ASMi-54L alarms, events and status, and the
performance monitoring statistics. See Chapter 6 for details.
Diagnostics
Activate tests and loopbacks on the various ports. See
Chapter 6 for details.
File Utilities
Use the file transfer utilities. See Chapter 4 for details.
3.5

To power off the ASMi-54L unit:
•
3-20
Turning Off the Unit
Remove the power cord from the power source.
Turning Off the Unit
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Chapter 4
Configuration
This chapter describes how to configure the ASMi-54L for management and
operational tasks. Configuration screens are shown, and configuration
parameters explained.
Note
The configuration screens presented in this chapter are taken from a terminal
screen, but most of the menus are similar to those viewed in Telnet and
Web-based application.
This chapter includes the following sections:
•
Configuring for Management
•
Configuring for Operation
•
Configuring the Internal Bridge
•
Configuring Quality of Service (QoS)
•
Configuring Link OAM
•
Transferring Software and Configuration Files.
For a complete list of all menu items, see menu in Chapter 3.
For instructions on accessing and navigating the screens, see Chapter 3.
4.1
Configuring for Management
This section describes how to configure the ASMi-54L for management
operations.
Entering Device Information
The ASMi-54L management software allows you to assign a name to the unit
and specify its location to distinguish it from the other devices installed in your
system. A contact person can also be assigned. Each of these fields can hold up
to 32 characters.

To enter device information:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Configuration>System>Management>Device
Information.
The Device Information screen appears.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Management
4-1
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Management>Device Information
Description
… (ASMi-54L, HW Version 2.5, SW Version 2.63)
1. Name
2. Location
3. Contact
… (ASMi-54L)
… (Location of the device)
… (Name of the contact person)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-1. Typical Device Information Screen
The description of the unit is factory set according to manufacturer
specifications. It cannot be modified.
2. Select Name, and type a name for the unit.
The default name is ASMi-54L.
3. Select Location, and type a location name/description.
4. Select Contact, and type the name of a contact person for this unit.
5. Press <S> to save the parameters.
The parameters are saved in the system.
Setting IP Host Parameters
You can manage the unit via a network management station connected to one
of the unit’s ports. To establish a proper connection, you must configure the
Host IP parameters. In addition, by selecting a forwarding mode and VLAN
parameters, you can create a separate management VLAN.

To define the Host IP parameters:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Configuration>System>Management>Host.
The Host screen appears.
2. Select DHCP parameter and define it as Disable.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Management>Host>DHCP
1. DHCP
(Disable)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-2. DHCP configuration screen
3. Press <S> to save the changes.
4-2
Configuring for Management
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
4. Return to Host screen.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Management>Host
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
IP Address
Mask
Default gateway
Read community
Write community
Trap community
DHCP
Encapsulation
…
…
…
…
…
…
>
>
(172.17.143.140)
(255.255.255.0)
(172.17.143.1)
(public)
(private)
(public)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-3. Host Screen
5. In the Host screen, select IP Address and enter the host IP.
6. Select Mask and enter the host subnet mask.
7. Select Default Gateway and enter the default gateway IP address.
8. Select Read Community and type the name of a community with read-only
authorization (the default is Public).
9. Select Write Community and type the name of a community with write
authorization (the default is Private).
10. Select Trap Community and type the name of a community to which the
unit should send traps (the default is Public).
11. Select Encapsulation to define VLAN tagging performed by the host.
The Encapsulation screen appears.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Management>Host>Encapsulation
1. Host tagging
2. Host VLAN ID [1-4094]
3. Host Priority Tag [0-7]
> (Tagged)
… (2)
… (0)
>
S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-4. Encapsulation Screen
12. In the Encapsulation screen, select Host Tagging and toggle between
Untagged and Tagged (the default is Untagged).
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Management
4-3
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual


Note
Untagged – The host sends and receives frames with no VLAN tag
to/from the bridge.
Tagged – The host receives frames only when they are tagged with
the host’s VLAN ID, and sends frames to the bridge with this tag.
When Host Tagging is set to Tagged, two parameters are added to the menu:
Host VLAN ID and VLAN Priority.
13. Select Host VLAN ID to specify the host VLAN ID (1–4094).
14. Select VLAN Priority to specify the priority level for the host VLAN (0–7).
15. Press <S> to save the changes.
16. Return to the Host screen and press <S> to save the parameters.
The changes are saved in the unit.
Configuring the Network Managers
The network management stations to which the SNMP agent sends traps can
be defined and modified. Up to ten managers can be defined. Entering the IP
address and corresponding subnet mask defines each management station. In
addition, you can temporarily prevent a manager station from receiving traps by
masking the network manager.

To edit the manager list:
1. Select Main Menu>Configuration>System>Management>Managers List.
The Management List screen appears.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Management>Managers List
Manager ID
1.
| 2.
v 3.
4.
5.
1. Change cell
Manager IP
1.1.1.1
2.2.2.2
3.3.3.3
4.4.4.4
5.5.5.5
Manager Trap Mask
Unmask
Unmask
Mask
Unmask
Unmask
… (1.1.1.1)
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-5. Manager List Screen
2. Move the cursor to the Manager IP cell you wish to modify by pressing the
Up and Down arrow keys and press <1>.
3. Enter a new IP address for the selected network manager.
4-4
Configuring for Management
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
4. Move the cursor to the Manager Trap Mask field and press <1> to toggle
between Mask and Unmask to mask or unmask traps for the selected
management station.
The default is Unmask.
After editing the manager list, the changes are saved automatically.
Configuring Management Access

To set up management access:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Configuration>System>Management>Management
Access.
The Management Access screen appears.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Management>Management Access
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
User Access
Telnet Access
SNMP Access
WEB Access
Access Control
>
>
>
>
>
(Enable)
(Enable)
(Enable)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-6. Management Access Screen
2. Select the permission setting for each access level: Enable or Disable (the
default is Enable).
For Web Access, select Enable, Disable, or Mng Only.
S
Note
Mng Only means that only users defined in the Managers List are allowed
access via Web.
3. To configure the Access Control List (ACL) select the Access Control option
and refer to the Access Control List Configuration section below.
4. Press <S> to save the changes.
The changes are saved in the unit.
Access Control List Configuration

To configure the ASMi-54L ACL:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Configuration>System>Management>Management
Access>Access Control.
The Access Control screen appears (Figure 4-7).
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Management
4-5
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Management>Management Access>Access Control
1. Config Access List
[]>
2. Show Statistics
[]
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-7. Access Control List Screen
2. Select Config Access List and press Add to add a new rule.
The ACL configuration screen appears (Figure 4-8).
ASMi-54L
*..>System>Management>Management Access>Access Control>Config Access List
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Rule type
Protocol
Addr Range
Src Addr
mask
Dst Port From
Dst Port To
Seq
>
>
...
...
...
...
...
(Deny)
(TCP)
(Any)
(0.0.0.0)
(0)
(0)
(1)
(1)
>
S-Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-8. ACL Configuration Screen
3. Configure the ACL rule as described in Table 4-1.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 if necessary.
Table 4-1. ACL Rule Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Rule type
Deny
Determines the available
rule operations
Permit
Default: Deny
Protocol
TCP
UDP
Determines the IP protocol
type
Default: TCP
Addr Range
Any
IP
Determines the permitted
adress format
Default: Any
4-6
Configuring for Management
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Src Addr
0.0.0.0
Packet source address
Default: 0.0.0.0
mask
(0)
Subnet mask
Default: 0
Dst Port From
(0)
The destination UDP/TCP
ports range lowest value
Default: 0
Dst Port To
(1)
The destination UDP/TCP
ports range largest value
Default: 1
Seq
(1)
Determines the order in
which the rules are applied
Default: 1

To display the ASMi-54L ACL:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Configuration>System>Management>Management
Access>Access Control.
The Access Control screen appears (Figure 4-7).
2. Select Show Statistics.
The ACL table appears (Figure 4-9).
ASMi-54L
...>System>Management>Management Access>Access Control>Show Statistics
Rule Id
1
Default Rule
Sequence
0
0
Matches
0
0
>
c-Clear Table; r-Refresh Table
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-9. ACL Table
3. Press <c> to clear the table or <r> to refresh it.
Setting Terminal Parameters
The Terminal is connected to the Control Port. The management software
allows you to configure the terminal baud rate.
Note
The Baud Rate parameter is masked during a Telnet session.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Management
4-7
Chapter 4 Configuration

Installation and Operation Manual
To change the terminal baud rate:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Configuration>System>Terminal.
The Terminal screen appears.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Terminal
1. Baud rate
> (115200 bps)
>
S-Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-10. Terminal Screen
2. Select Baud Rate.
The Baud Rate screen appears.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Terminal>Baud rate (19200 bps)
1. 9600 bps
2. 19200 bps
3. 115200 bps
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-11. Baud Rate Screen
3. Select the desired baud rate (9600, 19200, or 115200).
The default baud rate is 115200.
4. Return to the Terminal screen and press <S> to save the changes.
The changes are saved in the unit.
4.2
Configuring for Operation
This section explains how to configure the unit for operation.
Configuring the Clock Source
In the remote device (CPE), transmitted data is clocked according to the clock
received from the SHDSL line. In the central device (CO), transmitted data can
be clocked from either an internal clock within the ASMi-54L, or an external
clock via the E1 link.
4-8
Configuring for Operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual

Chapter 4 Configuration
To configure the clock source:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Configuration>System>Clock.
The Clock screen appears. Set the parameters as described in Table 4-2.
2. Select Master Clock and toggle between Internal and Receive.

Internal – Sets the internal clock as the clock source.

Receive – Sets an external clock from the E1 link as the clock source.
When the clock source is Receive, the Port parameter is active and set to
E1.
3. Press <S> to save the changes.
Note
This screen is visible if the TC layer of SHDSL is “HDLC” and STU is “Central”.
Note
The clock source can be changed from Internal to Receive if ASMi-54L has an E1
port, the Admin Status is “Up”, and at least one timeslot is defined as “Data”.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Clock>Master Clock
1. Clock Source
Port
> (Receive)
> (E1)
>
S-Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-12. Clock Screen
Table 4-2. Clock Source Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Clock Source
Receive
Internal
Indicates the source the
nodal timing is locked to.
Default: Internal
Port
E1
Displays the origin of the
clock.
Configuring Fault Propagation
The Fault Propagation screen is used for configuring fault propagation options.
A bi-directional fault propagation mechanism notifies both the local and remote
equipment about faulty conditions and enables devices at both ends of the link
to divert traffic when errors are detected, thus minimizing downtime and
enabling fast reroute.
When the Network>User Fault Propagation feature is enabled, the LAN ports
are deactivated whenever the SHDSL Line goes down (HDLC mode) or both
SHDSL lines go down (EFM mode). They will come up again once the SHDSL Line
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Operation
4-9
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
is resynchronized (HDLC mode) or at least one SHDSL Line is resynchronized
(EFM mode).
When the User>Network Fault Propagation feature is enabled, the SHDSL ports
are deactivated whenever the LAN port goes down. They come up again once
the activated LAN port is UP.
Note

Only one Fault Propagation option can be enabled.
To configure the fault propagation:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Configuration>System>Fault Propagation.
The Fault Propagation screen appears.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Fault Propagation
1. Network -> User Fault Propagation
2. User -> Network Fault Propagation
(Disable)
(Interface Deactivation)
>
A-Add; R-Remove
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-13. Fault Propagation Screen
2. Select Network>User Fault Propagation or User>Network Fault Propagation
and toggle between Interface Deactivation and Disable.
3. Press <S> to save the changes.
Configuring Date and Time
The Date and Time screen is used to configure the NTP client parameters.
The NTP client is used for receiving the date and time from the network. When
the NTP server is properly configured and accessible, the device displays the
real date and time as received from the NTP server, instead of the system
uptime, which is the default state.

To configure the NTP client parameters:
1. Select Configuration>System>Date and Time.
The Date and Time screen appears. Set the parameters as described in
Table 4-3.
2. Press <S> to save the changes.
4-10
Configuring for Operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Date and Time
1.
2.
3.
4.
System Date
System Time
Broadcast Mode
Poll Interval (minutes)[1 – 1440]
UTC Offset [-12 - +13]
NTP Servers
... (0000-00-00)
... (1:38:37)
(Disable)
... (15)
>
(00.00)
[]>
>
ESC-prev. menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-14. Date and Time Screen
Table 4-3. Date and Time Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
System Date
Valid date
Default: 0000-00-00
System Time
Valid time
Default: 00:00:00
Broadcast Mode
Unicast Client
When enabled (Unicast Client), the device
listens to NTP broadcast messages and learns
timestamps from them.
Disable
Default: Disable
Poll Interval
1 - 1440
Interval in minutes for polling the server
UTC Offset
-12 - +13
Offset from Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
Default: 00.00
NTP Servers

NTP Servers submenu
To configure NTP Servers:
1. Select Configuration>System>Date and Time>NTP Servers.
The NTP Servers screen opens. Set the parameters, as described in
Table 4-4.
2. To add a new NTP Server, press <A>.
The Add Server screen appears (see Figure 4-16). Set the parameters
as described in Table 4-4.
3. To remove a selected NTP Server, press <R>.
4. To clear data in the NTP Servers screen, press <C>.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Operation
4-11
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Date and Time>NTP Servers
NTP Server
Admin Status
Stratum
1 10.3.12.200
Prefer
->>
>
A-Add;R-Remove;C-Clear
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
UDP Port
123
5
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-15. NTP Servers Screen
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Date and Time>NTP Servers>Add Server
1
2
3
NTP Server
Admin Status
UDP Port
...
>
...
(0.0.0.0.)
(Prefer)
(123)
>
Please select item from 1 to 3
S-Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-16. Add NTP Server Screen
Table 4-4. NTP Servers Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
NTP Server
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
IP address of NTP server to provide timestamps
Admin Status
Disable
Enable
Prefer
The device sends NTP request to the server
configured as Prefer. If no server is configured
as Prefer or if the preferred server is not
answering, the device sends requests to
servers configured as Enable. It never sends
requests to servers configured as Disable.
Default: Disable
UDP Port
1-65535
Source UDP port of NTP packets sent to the
configured server.
Default: 123
Stratum (RO)

Stratum of the server configured in this screen
To modify an existing NTP Server:
•
4-12
0…255
0xFFFFFFFF
Navigate to Configuration>System>Date and Time>NTP Servers, select a
server, and press <Shift + M>.
Configuring for Operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
The Modify Server screen appears. Set the parameters as described in
Table 4-5.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Date and Time>NTP Servers>Modify Server
NTP Server
Stratum
Last TimeStamp
Received ddd:hh:mm:ss Ago
1. Admin Status
2. UDP Port
3. Query Server
...
...
...
...
>
...
(10.3.12.200)
(5)
(06-07-2009 12:50:34)
(000:00:01:05)
(Prefer)
(123)
(Off)
>
Please select item <1 to 3>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-17. Modify NTP Server Screen
Table 4-5. NTP Server Modification Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
NTP Server
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
IP address of NTP server to
provide timestamps
Stratum
0…255
0xFFFFFFFF
Stratum of the server
configured in this screen
Last Timestamp
dd-mm-yyyy hh:mm:ss
Last timestamp (date and time)
received from the server
configured in this screen. The
displayed timestamp
corresponds to the timezone
configuration.
Received ddd:hh:mm:ss Ago
ddd:hh:mm:ss
Time elapsed since last
timestamp was received.
Admin Status
Disable
Enable
Prefer
The device sends NTP request
to the server configured as
Prefer. If no server is configured
as Prefer or if the preferred
server is not answering, the
device sends requests to
servers configured as Enable. It
never sends requests to servers
configured as Disable.
Default: Disable
UDP Port
1-65535
Source UDP port of NTP packets
sent to the configured server.
Default: 123
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Operation
4-13
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Query Server
Off
On
A server where NTP request is
sent upon executing this
command. The table will be
refreshed when the server
answers.
Default: On
Setting Physical Layer Parameters
ASMi-54L has four Ethernet interfaces, one or two SHDSL interfaces, and one
optional E1 interface. The Fast Ethernet, E1, and SHDSL configuration menus
are accessed from the Physical Layer menu (Figure 4-18).
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer
1
2
3
Ethernet
E1
SHDSL
>
>
>
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-18. Physical Layer Menu Screen
Configuring the Ethernet Port
The following parameters can be configured for the Ethernet ports at the
physical level:

•
Administrative Status
•
Autonegotiation
•
Flow Control
•
Maximum capability advertised for autonegotiation procedure
•
Ingress Rate Limit
•
Rate Limit Packet Types
•
MDIX Auto Crossover
•
Alarm
To configure the Fast Ethernet port:
1. Navigate to Configuration>Physical Layer> Ethernet.
The Fast Ethernet Port Configuration screen appears. Set the
parameters as described in Table 4-6.
2. Press <S> to save the changes.
4-14
Configuring for Operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>Ethernet
Port
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
(1)
Administrative Status
Auto Negotiation
Flow Control
Max Capability Advertised
Ingress Rate Limit (Kbps)[64-100000]
Rate Limit Packet Types
MDIX Auto Cross Over
Alarm
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
(Up)
(Enable)
(Disable)
(100 Mbps Full Duplex)
(64)
(All)
(Enable)
(Unmasked)
>
F-Forward; B-Backward; S-Save
ESC-prev. menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-19. Fast Ethernet Port Configuration Screen
Table 4-6. Fast Ethernet Port Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Port
1…4
The Ethernet port number.
Default: 1
Administrative Status
Auto Negotiation
Up
The desired state of the Ethernet interface.
Down
Default: Down
Enable
Enables autonegotiation signaling over the
Ethernet.
Disable
Default: Enable
Flow Control
Enable
Disable
Used to configure the default administrative
PAUSE mode for this interface.
Default: Disable
Note: Changing Flow Control causes the device to
reset with confirmation.
Max Capability
Advertised
10 Mbps Half Duplex
10 Mbps Full Duplex
Specifies the set of capabilities advertised by the
local autonegotiation entity.
100 Mbps Half Duplex
Default: 100 Mbps Full Duplex
100 Mbps Full Duplex
Note: Appears only for user ports with RJ interface
and when autonegotiation is enabled.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Operation
4-15
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Ingress Rate Limit
If the desired Ingress Rate
Limit is between 64 – 1000,
inserted value should be
divisible by 64.
Default: 100,000
Rate Limit configured
If the desired Ingress Rate
Limit is between 1,000 –
100,000, inserted value
should be divisible by 1,000.
If the desired Ingress Rate
Limit is between 100,000 –
200,000, inserted value
should be divisible by
10,000.
Otherwise the inserted value
will be changed automatically
to the nearest legal value.
Rate Limit Packet
Types
All
Broadcast/Multicast/FUcast
Specifies the type of packets that undergo rate
limitation
Broadcast/Multicast
Default: All
Broadcast
MDIX Auto Cross Over
Enable
Disable
Enables connecting to any type of cable by auto
detect (cross, straight).
Default: Enable
Alarms
Unmasked
Enables/disables alarm indication of this port
Masked
Default: Unmasked
Configuring the E1 Port
Using EOC, the local Central Office (CO) and remote CPE unit’s E1 ports are
both available for viewing and some CPE device E1 parameters can be
configured via the CO.
Note

EOC is introduced in version 2.6. It does not apply if one of the devices is of a
lower version.
To configure the E1 port:
1. From the Configuration menu, select Physical Layer>E1.
The E1 configuration screens appear. Toggle between the Near-end and
Far-end screens using the Forward and Backward commands.
Note
4-16
There is no numbering of the parameters on the Far End screens. These screens
are Read-only, the parameters cannot be changed.
Configuring for Operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>E1
E1 Port Number
Unit
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Administrative Status
Interface Type
Line Type
Idle Code
Rx Sensitivity
User Name
Alarms
(1)
(Near End)
(Up)
(Balance)
> (Unframed)
… (7C)
(Short Haul)
(E1-1)
(Unmasked)
>
F-Forward; r-Refresh
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-20. E1 Configuration Screen – Near End (CO)
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>E1
E1 Port Number
Unit
Administrative Status
Interface Type
Line Type
Idle Code
Rx Sensitivity
User Name
Alarms
(1)
(Far End)
(Up)
(Balance)
> (Unframed)
… (7C)
(Short Haul)
(Rem E1-1)
(Unmasked)
>
F-Forward; r-Refresh;
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-21. E1 Configuration Screen – Far End (CO) Read-Only
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Operation
4-17
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>E1
E1 Port Number
Unit
1.
2.
3.
4.
(1)
(Near End)
Administrative Status
Line Type
Idle Code
Interface Type
Rx Sensitivity
User Name
Alarms
(Up)
> (Unframed)
… (7C)
(Balance)
(Short Haul)
(E1-1)
(Unmasked)
>
F-Forward; r-Refresh
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-22. E1 Configuration Screen – Near End (CPE) Read-Only
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>E1
E1 Port Number
Unit
(1)
(Far End)
Administrative Status
Interface Type
Line Type
Idle Code
Rx Sensitivity
User Name
Alarms
(Up)
(Balance)
> (Unframed
… (7C)
(Short Haul)
(Rem E1-1)
(Unmasked)
>
F-Forward; r-Refresh;
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-23. E1 Configuration Screen – Far End (CPE) Read-Only
2. Set the parameters as described in Table 4-7.
3. Press <S> to save the changes.
Table 4-7. E1 Port Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
E1 Port Number
1
E1 port number.
Default: 1
4-18
Configuring for Operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Parameter
Possible Values
Administrative Status
Up
E1 port activation.
Down
Default: Up
Balance
Defines whether the port is balanced or unbalanced
Unbalance
Default: Balance
Unframed
Defines type of framing, with or without CRC.
G.732N
Default: Unframed
G.732N-CRC
Note: If the error message “Line rate is not compatible
with TDM rate” occurs when changing this setting, see
Chapter 6 for resolution.
Interface Type
Line Type
G.732S
Idle Code
00 - FF
Remarks
Byte pattern of the data transmitted in the E1 idle
timeslots.
Default: 7C
Note: In Unframed mode,the parameter is invisible.
Rx Sensitivity
Long Haul
Short Haul
Defines the maximum attenuation of the receive signal
that can be compensated by the interface receive path.
Default: Short Haul
User Name
String up to 32
characters
Name given by the user to this interface.
Rem demonstrates that this is the remote unit E1 port.
Default: E1-1 or Rem E1-1
Alarms
Unmasked
Masked
Enables/disables alarm indication of this port
Default: Unmasked
Configuring the SHDSL Line
ASMi-54L has two independent SHDSL ports. Each port requires a 2-wire line.
Ports can be configured to operate separately (2-wire mode), or can be bonded
together in a group of two ports (4-wire mode).
Note
Since ports can be bonded together to provide a single transmission line, the
term line is used, instead of ports, on the supervision terminal screens.
Note
EOC runs over a live SHSDL line, so the remote device must be configured to
the Receive clock mode, in order to provide the line synchronization and
consequently EOC connectivity.

To configure SHDSL line:
•
Navigate to Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Line.
The SHDSL Line Configuration screen appears. Toggle between the
Near-end and Far-end screens using the Forward and Backward
commands. Set the parameters as described in Table 4-8.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Operation
4-19
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Line
Line
Unit
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
(1)
(Near End)
Administrative Status
Wire Mode
TC Layer
STU
Power Backoff[0 – 31]
Transmission Mode
Line Probe
Payload Rate (Kbps) [192-5696]
Clock Mode
Loop Attenuation Threshold (dB)[0…127]
SNR Margin Threshold (dB)[0…15]
Alarms
Repeaters
>
...
...
...
...
>
...
...
...
>
(Up)
(2 Wire)
(64-65 octet)
(Central)
(0)
(ANNEX A/F)
(Disable)
(192kbps)
(Plesiochronous_1)
(0)
(0)
(Unmasked)
>
S-Save; F-Forward; B-Backward; r-Refresh
ESC-prev. menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-24. SHDSL Line Configuration Screen –Near End (CO)
4-20
Note
Transmission Mode will be updated simultaneously on all lines.
Note
Line Probe is not supported when Extended Range over DSL Line is activated.
Note
The Repeaters parameter is visible in HDLC and CO modes when at least one
repeater is present.
Configuring for Operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Line
Line
Unit
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
8.
9.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
(1)
(Far End)
Administrative Status
Line Probe
Wire Mode
TC Layer
STU
Power Backoff[0 – 31]
Current Margin
>
Worst Margin
>
Transmission Mode
Payload Rate (Kbps) [192-5696]
Clock Mode
Loop Attenuation Threshold (dB)[0…127]
SNR Margin Threshold (dB)[0…15]
Alarms
Repeaters
(Up)
... (Disable)
>
(2 Wire)
(64-65 octet)
(Remote)
... (0)
(7)
(Disable)
... (ANNEX A/F)
... (192kbps)
>
(Plesiochronous_1)
... (0)
... (0)
... (Unmasked)
>
>
F-Forward; B-Backward; r-Refresh
ESC-prev. menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-25. SHDSL Line Configuration Screen –Far End (CO)
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Operation
4-21
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Line
Line
Unit
1.
2.
3.
4.
(1)
(Far End)
Administrative Status
Wire Mode
TC Layer
STU
Line Probe
Power Backoff[0 – 31]
Transmission Mode
Payload Rate (Kbps) [192-5696]
Current Margin
Worst Margin
Clock Mode
Loop Attenuation Threshold (dB)[0…127]
SNR Margin Threshold (dB)[0…15]
Alarms
Repeater
(Up)
>
(2 Wire)
(64-65 octet)
(Central)
(Enable)
... (0)
... (ANNEX A/F)
... (192kbps)
>
(7)
> (Disable)
>
(Plesiochronous_1)
... (0)
... (0)
... (Unmasked)
>
>
F-Forward; B-Backward; r-Refresh
ESC-prev. menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-26. SHDSL Line Configuration Screen –Far End (CPE)
4-22
Configuring for Operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Line
Line
Unit
1.
2.
3.
4.
(1)
(Near End)
Administrative Status
Wire Mode
TC Layer
STU
Power Backoff[0 – 31]
Transmission Mode
Line Probe
Payload Rate (Kbps) [192-5696]
Current Margin
Worst Margin
Clock Mode
Loop Attenuation Threshold (dB)[0…127]
SNR Margin Threshold (dB)[0…15]
Alarms
Repeaters
>
...
...
...
...
>
>
>
...
...
...
>
(Up)
(2 Wire)
(64-65 octet)
(Remote)
(0)
(ANNEX A/F)
(Disable)
(192kbps)
(7)
(Disable)
(Plesiochronous_1)
(0)
(0)
(Unmasked)
>
F-Forward; B-Backward; r-Refresh
ESC-prev. menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-27. SHDSL Line Configuration Screen –Near End (CPE)
Table 4-8. SHDSL Line Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Line
1-2
Index of SHDSL Line
Default: 1
Administrative Status
Up, Down
Administrative status of the SHDSL line.
UP – The selected line is enabled.
DOWN – The selected line is disabled. This state
should be selected as long as the line
configuration has not yet been completed, or
when it is necessary to stop traffic flow through
the line.
Default: Up
Wire Mode
2 Wire
4 Wire
Wire operation mode
2 Wire – Each port operates independently.
4 Wire – Two ports (with sequential index
numbers) are bonded together. This selection is
available only when TC Layer is HDLC.
Default: 2 Wire
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Operation
4-23
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
TC Layer
64-65-octet (EFM)
HDLC
Operational mode of SHDSL Line. Selects the
Transmission Convergence layer used by the
ASMi-54L module.
All the module ports use the same Transmission
Convergence layer (the last selection is
automatically applied to all the ports).
64/65-octet – TC layer uses 64/65-octet
encapsulation. This mode supports only packet
traffic over a single line (wire pair).
TDM – TC layer uses HDLC encapsulation. This
mode enables using multiple lines (wire pairs).
Default: 64-65-octet (EFM)
Note: If the alarm “Line rate is not compatible
with TDM rate” occurs when changing this setting,
see Chapter 6 for resolution.
STU
Central
Remote
Unique identification for all units in an
HDSL2/SHDSL span
Default: Remote (CPE device)
Note: All the module ports use the same mode
(the last selection is automatically applied to all
the ports).
Power Backoff
0 - 31
Configures the Power Backoff (in dB) of the
receiver, at the associated segment endpoint.
Power backoff is used to reduce the transmit
power below the nominal value specified in the
standards. This reduces interference caused by
your signal to other equipment using pairs in the
same cable, without degrading the link
transmission quality.
0 means that the nominal transmit power is
always used. Any other value indicates the
maximum power backoff value in dB below the
nominal transmit power specified in the
standards.
Default: 0 (off)
Transmission Mode
AnnexA/F
AnnexB/G
Regional setting of the SHDSL span
All the module ports use the same mode (the last
selection is automatically applied to all the ports)
ANNEX A/F – Compliance with Annex A or F of ITUT Rec. G.991.2, required for compatibility in North
American networks.
ANNEX B/G – Compliance with Annex B or G of
ITU-T Rec. G.991.2, required for compatibility in
European networks.
Default: AnnexB/G
4-24
Configuring for Operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Line Probe
Disable
Enable
Enable/disable support for Line Probe of the units
in an SHDSL span.
R/W when STU is Central
Default: Enable
Note: Line Probe is not supported when Extended
Range over DSL Line is activated.
Note: If the alarm “Line rate is not compatible
with TDM rate” occurs when chaging this setting,
see Chapter 6 for resolution.
Payload Rate (Kbps)
[192-15296]
For TC layer 64-65-octet - 192
– 15296
For TC-layer HDLC:
•
2 wire – 192 – 8576 (for
devices with E1)
•
4 wire – 384 – 12288 (E1)
Configures the transmission rate for the
associated SHDSL PME in bits-per-second (bps)
and includes both payload (user data) and any
applicable framing overhead.
Inserted value should be divisible by 64 (for 2
wire), 128 (for 4 wire), or 256 (for 8 wire).
Otherwise, the inserted value will be changed
automatically to the nearest legal value.
Default: 192
Current Margin
-10…21
Specifies the target margin for the measured
signal-to-noise ratio relative to the current noise
level.
Alternatively, line activation may be performed in
accordance with the Worst Margin value.
•
To use the signal-to-noise ratio measured
relative to the current noise level during SHDSL
line activation, select the desired value, in the
range of -10 to +21 dB.
•
To disable the use of the signal-to-noise ratio
measured relative to the current noise level,
select 0.
Default: 0
Note: Appears only when Line Probe is Enable.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Operation
4-25
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Worst Margin
-10…21
Specifies the target margin for the measured
signal-to-noise ratio relative to the reference
worst-case near-end crosstalk noise specified in
ITU-T Rec. G.991.2.
Alternatively, line activation may be performed in
accordance with the Current Margin value.
•
To use the signal-to-noise ratio measured
relative to the near-end crosstalk during
SHDSL line activation, select the desired value,
in the range of -10 to +21 dB.
•
To disable the use of the signal-to-noise ratio
measured relative to crosstalk and use the
signal-to-noise ratio measured relative to the
current noise level, select Disable.
Default: 0
Note: Appears only when Line Probe is Enable.
Clock Mode
Plesiochronous_1
Plesiochronous_2
Synchronous_3a
Enables configuration of the clock mode.
Default: Synchronous_3a (Ethernet user interface
only), Plesiochronous_2 (Ethernet + E1 user
interfaces)
Note: For Ethernet only user interface, the clock
mode is Synchronous_3a. For E1 + Ethernet user
interfaces, the clock mode is Plesiochronous_1 or
Plesiochronous_2 (user selectable).
Loop Attenuation
Threshold
0...127
The loop attenuation alarm threshold. Displays
whether the attenuation measured on the SHDSL
link exceeds the threshold value, and alarm is
generated.
Default: 0
SNR Margin Threshold
0…15
The SNR margin alarm threshold. Displays whether
the attenuation measured on the SHDSL link
exceeds the specified value, an alarm is
generated.
Default: 0
Alarms
Unmasked
Masked
Enables/disables alarm indication of this port
Default: Unmasked
See Configuring SHDSL Line Repeaters
Repeater
Note: Only when a repeater is connected.
Configuring the SHDSL Line Current Margin
The SNR margin is the difference between the desired SNR and the actual SNR.
Target SNR margin is the desired SNR margin for a unit. The SHDSL current
margin specifies the downstream/upstream current condition target SNR margin
for the SHDSL line.
4-26
Configuring for Operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Note

Chapter 4 Configuration
SHDSL current margin configuration is available only if the Line Probe option is
enabled.
To configure the SHDSL line current condition target SNR margin:
1. Select Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Line>Current Margin.
The SHDSL Current Margin screen appears (see Figure 4-28).
2. Select an item (1-32).
3. Press <S> to save the changes.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Line>Current Margin (7 dB)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
-10 dB
-9 dB
-8 dB
-7 dB
-6 dB
-5 dB
-4 dB
-3 dB
-2 dB
-1 dB
0 dB (Disable)
1 dB
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
2 dB
3 dB
4 dB
5 dB
6 dB
7 dB
8 dB
9 dB
10 dB
11 dB
12 dB
13 dB
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-28. SHDSL Line Current Margin Screen
Configuring the SHDSL Line Worst Margin
The SHDSL line worst margin is the downstream worst case target SNR margin
for an SHDSL line.
Note

SHDSL line worst margin configuration is available only if the Line Probe option
is enabled.
To configure the SHDSL line worst case target SNR margin:
1. Select Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Line>Worst Margin.
The SHDSL Line Margin screen appears.
2. Select an item (1-32).
3. Press <S> to save the changes.
Note
The SHDSL Line Worst Margin screen is the same as the SHDSL Line Current
Margin screen (except for the heading).
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Operation
4-27
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Configuring SHDSL Line Repeaters
SHDSL line repeaters extend the transmission distance of the ASMi-54L unit
operating on 2-wire lines. Employing TC-PAM 16 technology, the SHDSL line
repeaters can double transmission distances.
The SHDSL line repeater fully regenerates the received modem signal. In the
ASMi-54L unit, multiple repeaters (up to 8) can be used without introducing
jitter or wander problems.

To configure the SHDSL line repeater:
•
Navigate to Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Line>Repeaters.
The SHDSL Line Repeaters Configuration screen appears. Set the
parameters as described in Table 4-9 and press <S> to save the
changes.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Line>Repeaters
1.
2.
3.
4.
Repeater
Network Power Backoff
Customer Power Backoff
Network Soft Restart
Customer Soft Restart
(1)
(Disable)
(Disable)
(Ready)
(Ready)
>
S-Save; F-Forward; B-Backward
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-29. SHDSL Line Repeater Configuration Screen
Table 4-9. SHDSL Line Repeater Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Repeater
1–8
The repeater number.
Default: 1
Note: Appears only when at least one repeater is
present in span.
Network Power
Backoff
Customer Power
Backoff
4-28
Enable (Enchanced Power
Backoff)
Sets a network PowerBackoff configuration of the
choosed repeater.
Disable (Default Power
Backoff)
Default: Disable
Enable (Enchanced Power
Backoff)
Sets a customer PowerBackoff configuration of
the choosed repeater.
Disable (Default Power
Backoff)
Default: Disable
Configuring for Operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Network Soft Restart
Ready
Restart
Disable
Sets a network Soft Restart of the repeater’s side.
The parameters are:
•
Ready – ready to restart
•
Restart – states of restart (after saving,
returns to Ready)
•
Disable – restart is disabled.
Default: Disable
Customer Soft Restart
Ready
Restart
Disable
Sets a customer Soft Restart of the repeater’s
side.
The parameters are:
•
Ready – ready to restart
•
Restart – states of restart (after saving,
returns to Ready)
•
Disable – restart is disabled.
Default: Disable
Configuring Link OAM
ASMi-54L complies with standard IEEE 802.3ah (IEEE 802.3-2005) for
Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM), which was originally
developed for Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM) applications. OAM is a set of
functions designed to monitor network operation on a single Ethernet link
within a network, in order to detect network faults and measure its
performance.
Ethernet Link OAM Configuration menu has two submenus:
•
Link OAM Descriptors
•
Link OAM Parameters.
The Link OAM Descriptors submenu allows you to display and set the 802.3ah
OAM link configuration Descriptors, while the Link OAM Parameters submenu
lets you display and set the 802.3ah OAM link configuration Parameters not
covered by Descriptors.

To configure Link OAM:
•
Navigate to Configuration>Application>Link OAM.
The Link OAM Configuration screen appears (see Figure 4-30). Set the
link OAM Descriptors and/or link OAM Parameters for each SHDSL link,
as described in the corresponding sections below.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Operation
4-29
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>Link OAM
1. Link OAM Descriptors
2. Link OAM Parameters
>
>
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-30. Link OAM Configuration Screen
Configuring Link OAM Descriptors

To configure link OAM Descriptors:
•
Navigate to Configuration>Application>Link OAM>Link OAM Descriptors.
The Link OAM Descriptor Configuration screen appears (see
Figure 4-31). Set the parameters as described in Table 4-10.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>Link OAM>Link OAM Descriptors
1. Descriptor Number
2. OAM Mode
3. OAM Rate Limit [1 – 100]
… (1)
> (Passive)
… (10)
>
Please select item <1 to 3)
R-Remove
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-31. Link OAM Descriptor Configuration Screen
Table 4-10. Link OAM Descriptor Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Descriptor Number
1 –3 max. number
of Descriptors
Defines the Descriptor for the OAM link
configuration
Default: 1
Link OAM Mode
Active
Passive
Defines whether the 802.3ah OAM mode is
active/passive at the current port.
Default: Passive
Rate Limit
1-100 – max. rate
Specifies the number of OAM frames that
can be sent in one second.
Default: Empty value
4-30
Configuring for Operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Configuring Link OAM Parameters

To configure link OAM Parameters:
•
Navigate to Configuration>Applications>Link OAM>Link OAM Parameters.
The Link OAM Parameter Configuration screen appears (see
Figure 4-32). Set the parameters as described in Table 4-11.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Link OAM>Link OAM
Parameters
SHDSL Port
OAM Status
1. Descriptor Number
… (1)
> (Disabled)
… (1)
>
F – Forward
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-32. Link OAM Parameter Configuration Screen
Table 4-11. Link OAM Parameter Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
SHDSL Port
1–2
Defines the number of the current SHDSL port.
Default: 1
OAM Status
Disabled
Enabled
Defines whether the 802.3ah OAM mode is
performed at the current port.
Default: Disabled
Note: The 802.3ah OAM status can be set as
Enabled only when the Descriptor is assigned to
the current SHDSL link.
Descriptor
Number
1 –3 max. number
of Descriptors
Empty value
Displays a valid Descriptor number.
Default: Empty value
Note: The parameter can be assigned only when
the link OAM Status is Disabled.
Configuring the SHDSL Physical Coding Sublayer (PCS)
PCSs are defined in IEEE 802.3-2005. The ASMi‑54L internal SHDSL processing
subsystem enables configuration of the desired parameter for each SHDSL line
(port). Currently, ASMi‑54L supports single PCS, which means that two SHDSL
lines (ports) represent a single PCS entity.

To configure SHDSL PCS:
•
Navigate to Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>PCS.
The SHDSL PCS Configuration screen appears. Set the parameters as
described in Table 4-12 and press <S> to save the changes.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Operation
4-31
Chapter 4 Configuration
Note
Installation and Operation Manual
The SHDSL PCS screen is visible only when the device is configured to 64-65
Octets TC-Layer.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>PCS
PCS
(1)
Lines
1. Administrative Status
(1,2, )
…(Up)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-33. SHDSL PCS Configuration Screen
Table 4-12. SHDSL PCS Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
PCS (Physical Coding
Sublayer)
1...2
Index of the SHDSL PCS.
Lines
1,2,3,4
Lines that are part of the PCS
Administrative
Status
Up
Administrative status of the SHDSL PCS.
Down
Default: Up
Default: 1
Configuring the SHDSL DS1

To configure SHDSL DS1:
1. Navigate to Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Internal DS1.
The SHDSL DS1 Configuration screen appears.
Note
Internal DS1 screen is visible for E1 port only.
2. Toggle between the Near-end and Far-end screens using the Forward and
Backward commands.
3. Set the parameters as described in Table 4-13.
4-32
Configuring for Operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Internal DS1
E1 Port Number
Unit
1. TS Assignment
2. TS0 Mode
(1)
(Near End)
>
(Transparent)
>
F-Forward; r-Refresh
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-34. SHDSL DS1 Configuration Screen – Near End (CO)
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Internal DS1
E1 Port Number
Unit
TS0 Mode
1. TS Assignment
(1)
(Far End)
(Transparent)
>
>
F-Forward; r-Refresh
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-35. SHDSL DS1 Configuration Screen – Far End (CO)
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Internal DS1
E1 Port Number
Unit
TS0 Mode
1. TS Assignment
(1)
(Near End)
(Looped)
>
>
F-Forward; r-Refresh
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-36. SHDSL DS1 Configuration Screen – Near End (CPE)
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Operation
4-33
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Internal DS1
E1 Port Number
Unit
TS0 Mode
1. TS Assignment
(1)
(Far End)
(Looped)
>
>
F-Forward; r-Refresh
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-37. SHDSL DS1 Configuration Screen - Far End (CPE)
Table 4-13. SHDSL DS1 Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
E1 port
1
E1 port number
Default: 1
Unit
Near End
Far End
TS Assignment
TS0
Describes the device status location.
Timeslot assignment submenu
Transparent
Looped
Transparent – TSO of E1 frame is transparently
transmitted.
Looped – TSO of E1 frame is looped toward the
receive side and isn’t transmitted over SHDSL.
Visible if device has an E1 port
Default: Transparent
Note: If the alarm “Line rate is not compatible with
TDM rate” occurs when changing this setting, see
Chapter 6 for resolution.
Assigning Timeslots
Timeslot assignment screen enables read and write options for both local and
remote devices, since the timeslots configuration may be different for each
device.
TS0 mode, however can only be configured from the CO. When the ASMi-54L
works with LRS-102 or MP-4100 chassis, timeslot assignment is enforced by
the chassis, therefore TS assignment screen is read-only.

To assign timeslots:
1. Navigate to Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Internal DS1>Time Slot
Assignment.
The SHDSL Time Slot Assignment screen appears (Figure 4-38).
2. Toggle between the Near-end and Far-end screens using the Forward and
Backward commands.
4-34
Configuring for Operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
3. Set the parameters as described in Table 4-14.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Internal DS1>TS Assignment
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Port
TS1 :
TS2 :
TS3 :
TS4 :
TS5 :
TS6 :
TS7 :
TS8 :
TS9 :
TS10 :
TS11 :
(1)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Unit
TS12
TS13
TS14
TS15
TS16
TS17
TS18
TS19
TS20
TS21
TS22
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
(Near...)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
TS23 :
TS24 :
TS25 :
TS26 :
TS27 :
TS28 :
TS29 :
TS30 :
TS31 :
Full
Clear
>
F-Forward; r-Refresh
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
1 M/ 2 C
Figure 4-38. SHDSL Time Slot Assignment Screen – Near End (CO)
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Internal DS1>TS Assignment
Port
Unit
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
TS5
TS6
TS7
TS8
TS9
(1)
(Far ...)
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
TS10
TS11
TS12
TS13
TS14
TS15
TS16
TS17
TS18
TS19
TS20
TS21
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
TS22
TS23
TS24
TS25
TS26
TS27
TS28
TS29
TS30
TS31
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
>
F-Forward; r-Refresh
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
1 M/ 2 C
Figure 4-39. SHDSL Time Slot Assignment Screen – Far End (CO)
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Operation
4-35
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Internal DS1>TS Assignment
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Port
TS1 :
TS2 :
TS3 :
TS4 :
TS5 :
TS6 :
TS7 :
TS8 :
TS9 :
TS10 :
TS11 :
(1)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Unit
TS12
TS13
TS14
TS15
TS16
TS17
TS18
TS19
TS20
TS21
TS22
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
(Near...)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
TS23 :
TS24 :
TS25 :
TS26 :
TS27 :
TS28 :
TS29 :
TS30 :
TS31 :
Full
Clear
>
F-Forward; r-Refresh
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
1 M/ 2 C
Figure 4-40. SHDSL Time Slot Assignment Screen – Near End (CPE)
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Internal DS1>TS Assignment
Port
Unit
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
TS5
TS6
TS7
TS8
TS9
(1)
(Far ...)
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
TS10
TS11
TS12
TS13
TS14
TS15
TS16
TS17
TS18
TS19
TS20
TS21
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
TS22
TS23
TS24
TS25
TS26
TS27
TS28
TS29
TS30
TS31
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
>
F-Forward; r-Refresh
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
(Data)
1 M/ 2 C
Figure 4-41. SHDSL Time Slot Assignment Screen – Far End (CPE)
4-36
Configuring for Operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Table 4-14. SHDSL Time Slot Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Port
1
E1 port number
Default: 1
TS1 – TS31
Data
NC
The type of timeslot
Default: Data
Note: If the alarm “Line rate is not compatible with TDM
rate” occurs when changing this setting, see Chapter 6
for resolution.
Configuring the Internal Bridge
The internal bridge connects the unit’s ports. Configure the bridge to process
the VLAN tags properly for maintaining priority of the data flows.
The bridge operates in transparent mode (learning is disabled) or filtered mode
(learning and filtering are enabled).

To configure the internal bridge:
1. Navigate to Configuration>Applications>Bridge.
The Bridge screen appears (see Figure 4-42). The parameters are
described in Table 4-15.
2. For Static MAC Table configuration, see Using the Static MAC Table.
3. For Bridge Port configuration, see Configuring the Bridge Ports.
4. For VLAN Membership configuration (in Aware bridge only), see Configuring
VLAN Membership.
5. Press <S> to save the changes.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>Bridge
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
VLAN Mode
Forwarding Mode
Aging Time (sec) [60 – 4080]
Static MAC Table
Bridge Port
VLAN Membership
> (Aware)
> (Filter)
… (300)
[]>
>
>
>
S-Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-42. Bridge Screen (VLAN in Aware Mode)
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Operation
4-37
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>Bridge
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
VLAN Mode
Forwarding Mode
Aging Time (sec) [60 – 4080]
Static MAC Table
Bridge Port
> (Unaware)
> (Filter)
… (300)
[]>
>
>
S-Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-43. Bridge Screen (VLAN in Unaware Mode)
Note
The VLAN Membership configuration submenu appears in Aware mode only.
Table 4-15. Bridge Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
VLAN Mode
Aware
Forwarding is based on MAC address only or on
VLAN+MAC.
Unaware
• Aware – Bridge operates according to 802.1Q
• Unaware – Operates according to 802.1D.
Default: Unaware
Forwarding
Mode
Filter
Transparent
Determines whether the bridge learns MAC
addresses.
• Filter – Learning and filtering are enabled
• Transparent – No learning is performed. Each
packet received is forwarded to all other ports
automatically, unless static MAC is used.
Default: Transparent
Aging Time
(sec)
60…4080
Aging time for entries in the MAC table. If the
aging time elapses, and no frame has been
received from the MAC, it is erased from the MAC
table.
Default: 300
4-38
Static MAC
Table
Static Mac table configuration submenu.
Bridge port
Bridge Port configuration submenu.
VLAN
Membership
VLAN Membership configuration submenu.
Configuring for Operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Using the Static MAC Table
Static MAC addresses are stored in the MAC table.

To add a static MAC address:
1. Navigate to Configuration>Applications>Bridge>Static MAC Table.
The Static MAC Table screen appears (see Figure 4-44). The parameters
are described in Table 4-16.
2. To add a static MAC address, press A (Add Entry).
The Static MAC Table screen display changes, as shown in Figure 4-45.
3. In the Add mode:
Note
•
Select VLAN ID and enter a new VLAN
•
Select MAC Address and enter a new MAC address
•
Select Receive Bridge Port and assign the interface to attach these
VLAN ID and MAC address.
VLAN ID parameter appears in Aware VLAN mode only.
4. Press <S> to save the changes.
5. Press <ESC> to return to the Static MAC Table screen.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>Bridge>Static MAC Table
1
2
3
4
5
Vlan Id
MAC address
10
11
12
13
14
111111111111
222222222222
333333333333
444444444444
555555555555
Receive Bridge Port
3
4
3
3
4
>
A – Add; R-Remove; C-Clear
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-44. Static MAC Table Screen
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Operation
4-39
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
MAC table handling
1. Vlan Id[1 – 4095]
… (0)
2. MAC Address
… (000000000000)
3. Receive Bridge Port [1 – 6] … (0)
>
S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-45. Static MAC Table, Add Mode
Table 4-16. Static MAC Table Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
VLAN ID
1 - 4095
ID of VLAN to which the entry
belongs.
Default: 0
MAC Address
MAC string format
Static MAC address.
Default: 00-00-00-00-00-00
Receive Bridge Port
1–6
Bridge port to which the entry
belongs.
Default: 0

To remove a static address from the table:
1. Select Configuration>Applications>Bridge>Static MAC Table.
The Static MAC Table screen appears (see Figure 4-44).
2. Select a MAC address that you want to remove and press <R>.
The MAC address is deleted from the table.

To clear the MAC table:
1. Select Configuration>Applications>Bridge>Static MAC Table.
The Static MAC Table screen appears (see Figure 4-44).
2. Press <C> to clear the table.
The following message appears:
Are you sure (Y/N)?
3. Press <Y> to confirm deletion of all MAC addresses from the table.
Configuring the Bridge Ports
The Bridge Ports default mapping is described in Table 4-17.
4-40
Configuring for Operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Table 4-17. Bridge Ports Default Mapping

Bridge Port
Configured to
1
Reserved for management host
2
Ethernet Port 1
3
Ethernet Port 2
4
Ethernet Port 3
5
Ethernet Port 4
6
SHDSL Port
To change bridge port configuration:
1. Navigate to Configuration>Applications>Bridge>Bridge Port.
2. The Bridge Ports screen appears (see Figure 4-46). The parameters are
described in Table 4-18.
Note
Bridge Port 1 is reserved for management.
3. Press <F> or <B> to scroll through the Bridge ports.
4. Press <S> to save the changes.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>Bridge>Bridge Port
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Bridge Port [2 – 6]
Bind
Egress Tag Handling
Activation
Port VID/Stacking VID[1 – 4094]
Copy Original Priority
Default Priority Tag [0-7]
Ingress Tag Handling
TPID (Ether type)[0-ffff]
...
>
>
>
...
...
...
>
...
>
F-Forward; B-Backward; S-Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
(2)
(ETH-1)
(None)
(Enable)
(2)
(Disable)
(0)
(None)
(8100)
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-46. Bridge Port Screen
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Operation
4-41
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Table 4-18. Bridge Port Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Bridge port
number
2 –6 number of
bridge ports
Bridge port number.
Bind(RO)
ETH1 - ETH4
PCS1
The physical interface type to be used in binding.
Egress Tag
Handling ( RO)
Stacking
None
Adds the PVID or none to every frame transmitted from the port. The
value depends on the value of Ingress Tag Handling (if Ingress Tag
Handling is None, Egress Tag Handling is None too; if Ingress Tag
Handling is Stripping, Egress Tag Handling is Stacking).
Default: 2
Default: None
Activation
Enable
Disable
None
Specifies whether or not this port is part of the bridge. Press the
option number to toggle enable/disable. When not bounded, the
parameter value is None (-).
Default: None
Ingress Filtering
Enable
Disable
When enabled, the device will discard incoming frames for VLANs
which do not include this port in its member set. When disabled, the
port will accept all incoming frames.
Default: Disable
Note: Appears only in VLAN Aware mode.
Accept Frame
Type
Admit All
Tag Only
When set as Tag Only, the device will discard untagged frames.
When set as Admit All, untagged frames received on this port will be
accepted and assigned to the PVID for this port.
Default: All
Note: Appears only in VLAN Aware mode.
Port VID /
Stacking VID
1–4094
This is the PVID, the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or
priority-tagged frames received on this port. If Stacking is enabled,
this is the tag to be added.
Default: 0
Copy Origin
Priority
Enable
Copy priority from original frame.
Disable
Default: Disable
Default Priority
Tag
[0 – 7]
Default VLAN frame priority. Applies to untagged frames.
Ingress Tag
Handling
None
Strip the PVID or none from every received frame.
Stripping
Default: None
TPID (Ether
type)
0–FFFF
Set the Default TPID according to the user configuration.
Default: 0
Default: 8100
Configuring VLAN Membership

To configure VLAN Membership:
1. Navigate to Configuration>Applications>Bridge>VLAN Membership.
4-42
Configuring for Operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
The VLAN Membership screen appears (see Figure 4-47). The
parameters are described in Table 4-19.
Note
VLAN Membership screen appears in Aware VLAN Mode only.
2. Select VLAN ID, and type the VLAN ID you wish to configure.
3. Press <S> to save.
4. Select Egress Tagged Ports. Press <A> to add and define the set of ports to
transmit packets for this VLAN as tagged.
5. Press <S> to save.
6. Select Egress Untagged Ports. Press <A> to add and define the set of ports
to transmit packets for this VLAN as untagged.
7. Select Egress Unmodified Ports. Press <A> to add and define the set of
ports to transmit packets for this VLAN as unchanged.
8. Press <A> to add BP to this VLAN.
9. Press <F> or <B> to toggle through the VLAN IDs.
10. Press <R> to remove the configuration.
11. Press <S> to save the VLAN Membership configuration.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>Bridge>VLAN Membership
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
VLAN Id[1 – 4094]
Egress Tagged Ports
Egress Untagged Ports
Egress Unmodified Ports
VlanID Priority
... (1)
>
(1,2)
>
(3,4)
>
(5)
>
S-Save; F-Forward; B-Backward; R-Remove
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-47. VLAN Membership Screen
Note
A maximum of 64 VLANs can be defined due to hardware limitations.
Note
A port for which Egress Tag Handling is configured as Stacking will not operate
according VLAN membership rules.
Table 4-19. VLAN Membership Screen Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
VLAN ID
1 - 4094
VLAN ID
Default: 1 – First configured VLAN
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Operation
4-43
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Egress Tagged Ports
1–n
(where n is the
number of bridge
ports)
The set of ports that will transmit
egress packets for this VLAN as
tagged.
Egress Untagged Ports
Egress Unmodified Ports
1–n
(where N is the
number of bridge
ports)
1–n
(where n is the
number of bridge
ports)
Default: Null list
The set of ports that will transmit
egress packets for this VLAN as
untagged.
Default: Null list
The set of ports that will transmit
egress packets for this VLAN as
unmodified.
Default: Null list
Configuring Quality of Service (QoS)
ASMi-54L uses three methods of traffic classification:
•
802.1 priority mapping
•
DSCP priority mapping, using tag values
•
Priority mapping per bridge port
•
Priority mapping per VLAN ID.
The classification method is chosen using the Priority Classification menu.
Four traffic queues can be assigned priorities using the Priority Mapping menu.
These queues are priority queues. Class 0 (default) has the lowest priority and
Class 3 has the highest priority. Two modes of operation are supported:
•
Strict Priority (SP) –packets arriving with lower priority will be transmitted
only after all packets with higher priority have been transmitted. It implies
possible starvation of the lower priority traffic if the higher priority traffic
uses all the available bandwidth
•
Weighted Fair Queue (WFQ) –packets will be transmitted according to
1:2:4:8 scheme (first 8 frames of highest priority, then 4 frames of lower
priority, then 2 frames of lower priority, then 1 frame of the lowest
priority). This prevents starvation of lower priority frames.
Selecting a Traffic Classification Method

To select a traffic classification method:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Applications>QoS.
The QoS screen appears (see Figure 4-48). The parameters are
described in Table 4-20.
2. On the Qos screen, select Priority Classification.
The QoS Priority Classification screen appears (see Figure 4-49).
3. Select the desired traffic classification method:
4-44
Configuring for Operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration

802.1p

DSCP

Per Port

Per VLAN ID.
4. Set the desired Priority Mapping and Scheduling Mode (for more
information, refer to corresponding sections below).
5. Press <S> to save the changes.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>QoS
1. Priority Classification
2. Priority Mapping
3. Scheduling Mode
> (802.1p)
>
(SP)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-48. QoS Screen
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>QoS>Priority Classification (802.1p)
1.
2.
3.
4.
802.1p
DSCP
Per Port
Per VlanID
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-49. QoS Priority Classification Screen
Table 4-20. QoS Screen Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Priority Classification
802.1p
DSCP
The method used for classifying traffic
for 4 different classes.
Per Port
Default: 802.1p
Per VLAN ID
Priority Mapping
0-2
3
A map to 3 different traffic classes
according to the method chosen.
Note: Traffic class 3 represents
management.
Default: 0
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Operation
4-45
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Scheduling Mode
WFQ
The Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ)
scheme or Strict Priority (SP) currently in
use.
SP
Default: SP
Assigning Priorities to Traffic Queues for 802.1p

To assign priorities to traffic queues for 802.1p:
1. Navigate to Configuration>Applications>QoS>Priority Classification.
The QoS Priority Classification screen appears (see Figure 4-49).
2. Select 802.1p as the desired traffic classification method.
3. Select Main Menu>Configuration>Applications>QoS.
The QoS screen appears (see Figure 4-48).
4. Select Priority Mapping.
The Priority Mapping (802.1p) screen appears (see Figure 4-50).
5. Select the desired priority (0–7) and enter the assigned traffic class number
(0–3). Each traffic class can be assigned to more than one priority.
6. Repeat the above step for all priorities.
7. Press <S> to save the changes.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>QoS>Priority Mapping
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
User
User
User
User
User
User
User
User
Priority
Priority
Priority
Priority
Priority
Priority
Priority
Priority
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class
0)
0)
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)
>
‘0’ is the Lowest Traffic Class
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-50. Priority Mapping Screen (802.1p)
Assigning Priorities to Traffic Queues for DSCP

To assign priorities to traffic queues for DSCP:
1. Navigate to Configuration>Applications>QoS>Priority Classification.
The QoS Priority Classification screen appears (see Figure 4-49).
4-46
Configuring for Operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
2. Select DSCP as the desired traffic classification method.
3. Select Configuration>Applications>QoS.
The QoS screen appears (see Figure 4-48).
4. Select Priority Mapping.
The Priority Mapping (DSCP) screen appears (see Figure 4-51). The
menu lists only the Tag values that have been changed from their
default values.
5. Select the desired tag value (0–63) and enter the assigned traffic class
number (0–3). Each traffic class can be assigned to more than one tag. To
add a new entry, select a (add) and enter the tag value and traffic class
number.
6. Repeat the above step for all tag values you wish to change.
7. Press <A> (Add) to add tag values.
8. To remove a Tag value, change its Traffic Class to default (0).
9. Press <S> to save the changes.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>QoS>Priority Mapping
1.
2.
3.
4.
Tag
Tag
Tag
Tag
Value
Value
Value
Value
0
11
21
63
>
>
>
>
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
Class
Class
Class
Class
0)
0)
1)
3)
>
‘0’ is the Lowest Traffic Class
a – Add
ESC-Previous menu; !-Main menu; &-Exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-51. Priority Mapping Screen (DSCP)
Notes
• Only entries different from the default are displayed.
• Only entries different from default tag values can be added.
Assigning Priorities to Traffic Queues Per Bridge Port

To assign priorities to traffic queues per bridge port:
1. Select Configuration>Applications>QoS>Priority Classification.
The QoS Priority Classification screen appears (see 4-46).
2. Select Per Port as the desired traffic classification method.
3. Select Configuration>Applications>QoS.
The QoS screen appears (see Figure 4-48).
4. Select Priority Mapping.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Operation
4-47
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
The Priority Mapping (Per Port) screen appears (see Figure 4-52).
5. Select the desired bridge port.
6. The Traffic Class of the selected port is displayed according to the Default
Priority Tag for the port (as determined in
Configuration>Application>Bridge> Bridge port menu).

For Default Priority Tag =0 or 1, the Traffic class is 0

For Default Priority Tag =2 or 3, the Traffic class is 1

For Default Priority Tag =4 or 5, the Traffic class is 2

For Default Priority Tag =6 or 7, the Traffic class is 3.
7. Repeat the above step for all active bridge ports.
8. Press <S> to save the changes.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>QoS>Priority Mapping
Bridge Port [1-6]
1. Traffic Class
...
>
(2)
(Traffic Class 0)
>
‘0’ is the Lowest Traffic Class
F – Forward; B – Backward; g – Go To
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-52. Priority Mapping Screen (Per Port)
Assigning Priorities to Traffic Queues Per VLAN ID

To assign priorities to traffic queues per VLAN ID:
1. Select Configuration>Applications>QoS>Priority Classification.
The QoS Priority Classification screen appears (see 4-46).
2. Select Per VlanID as the desired traffic classification method and press S to
save configuration.
Note
Per VlanID priority option appears in the Aware VLAN Mode only.
3. Select Configuration>Applications>Bridge.
The Bridge configuration screen appears (Figure 4-53).
4-48
Configuring for Operation
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>Bridge
1. Vlan Mode
>
(Aware)
2. Forwarding Mode
>
(Filter)
3. Aging Time (sec)[60 - 4080] ... (300)
4. Static MAC Table
[]>
5. Bridge Port
>
6. Vlan Membership
>
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-53. Bridge Screen
4. Select Vlan Membership.
The VLAN Membership screen appears (Figure 4-54).
5. Insert ID of the VLAN, which priority is configured, and press <S> to save
the changes.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>Bridge>Vlan Membership
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Vlan Id[1 - 4094]
...
Egress Tagged Ports
>
Egress Untagged Ports >
Egress Unmodified Port>
VlanId Priority
>
(1)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(Traffic Class 0)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-54. VLAN Membership Screen
6. Select Vlan ID Priority.
The Traffic Class of the selected VLAN is displayed (Figure 4-55).
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring for Operation
4-49
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>Bridge>Vlan Membership>VlanId Priority
1.
2.
3.
4.
Traffic
Traffic
Traffic
Traffic
Class
Class
Class
Class
0
1
2
3
>
‘0’ is the Lowest Traffic Class
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-55. VLAN Traffic Class Options
7. Select the desired Traffic Class for the specified VLAN.
8. Press <S> to save the changes.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>Bridge>Vlan Membership
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Vlan Id[1 - 4094]
...
Egress Tagged Ports
>
Egress Untagged Ports >
Egress Unmodified Port>
VlanId Priority
>
(1)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(Traffic Class 3)
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-56. Configured VLAN ID Priority
Assigning an Operation Scheduling Mode

To assign an operation scheduling mode:
1. Navigate to Configuration>Applications>QoS>Scheduling Mode.
2. Select the desired operation scheduling mode, as follows:

WFQ

SP.
For parameter descriptions, refer to Table 4-20.
3. Press <S> to save the changes.
4.3
Performing Additional Tasks
This section provides procedures for the following tasks:
•
4-50
Displaying the Inventory
Performing Additional Tasks
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
•
Changing User Name and Password
•
Transferring Software and Configuration Files
•
Resetting ASMi-54L.
Displaying the Inventory
The inventory displays a description of the unit, including its hardware revision
and power supply type.
Note

The Inventory screen contains a table that is 132 characters in width. It is best
viewed by setting your terminal display width to 132 character.
To display the inventory:
1. Select Main Menu>Inventory.
The Inventory table appears (Figure 4-57).
2. Use the arrow keys to navigate throughout the table.
ASMi-54L
Main Menu>Inventory
ID
1001
4001
| 7001
v 7002
7003
7004
7005
7006
7009
7010
Description
Vendor type
ASMi-54L Device
Power Supply WR
Fast Eth Port 1
Fast Eth Port 2
Fast Eth Port 3
Fast Eth Port 4
SHDSL Line 1
SHDSL Line 2
RS-232 Control
E1 port 1
- >>
Class
Chassis
Power Supply
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Entity name
ASMi-54L
PS
FAST 1
FAST 2
FAST 2
FAST 4
P 1
P 2
Control Port
E 1
HWRev
0.00
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-57. Typical Inventory Screen
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Performing Additional Tasks
4-51
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Changing User Name and Password
From the User Access menu you can change the current user name and
password. ASMi-54L supports two user names and passwords. Table 4-21 lists
the default user settings supplied with the unit.
Table 4-21. Default User Settings

User
User Name
Password
1
su
1234
2
user
1234
To change the current user name and password:
1. Navigate to Configuration>System>Management>Management Access>User
Access.
The User Access screen appears (Figure 4-58).
2. Select User Name, and enter a new user name.
The user name can contain up to eight characters.
3. Select Old Password and enter the current password.
The default is 1234.
4. Select New password and assign a new password of up to eight characters
to the new or existing user name.
Note
•
The password is displayed only if both the user name and the password are
valid.
•
The password is case sensitive.
•
The password cannot contain #symbol, otherwise WEB access can be
rejected.
5. Select Confirm New Password to confirm the new password.
If the new password is incorrect, the Illegal confirm password error
message appears. Reassign the new password.
6. Press <S> to save the changes.
The new password is saved.
4-52
Performing Additional Tasks
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Management>Management Access>User Access
1.
2.
3.
4.
User Level
User name
Old Password
New Password
Confirm New Password
…
…
…
…
(Super User)
(su)
(********)
(********)
(********)
>
S-Save; F-Forward
ESC-Prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-58. User Access Screen
Transferring Software and Configuration Files
This section provides procedures for:
•
Installing new software releases on the ASMi-54L unit
•
Transferring configuration files.
A software version is stored in a partition of the flash memory which also
contains a boot program. Two software versions can be stored at the same
time. The software is stored in a compressed format. The active version is
decompressed and loaded into the unit’s RAM upon power-up. The passive
software is kept for backup purposes. If the active software becomes
corrupted, you can swap it with the backup. By default, the unit is delivered
with active software only.
New software releases are distributed as *.img files, which can be downloaded
to the ASMi-54L. When starting a download, the current backup is erased and
the new software is placed in the backup partition. When downloading is
complete, the unit checks the integrity of the new software file. If it is correct,
the backup and active files are swapped. The new software release becomes
active and the formerly active software becomes the backup. If a failure occurs
while downloading, the new version is erased. In this case, only one version
remains stored in the flash memory.
Configuration files can be uploaded for storage and backup.
Management software allows file transfer via TFTP or XMODEM. The software
files can also be downloaded to ASMi-54L via VXWORKS Boot Manager, using
XMODEM or TFTP/FTP, as explained in Chapter 6.
TFTP Application
The TFTP protocol is typically used for remote IP-to-IP file transfers via the
unit's Ethernet interface. It can also be used, however, for local file transfer, as
the Ethernet interface transfer rate is much faster than that of the RS-232
interface.
For TFTP file transfers, a TFTP server application must be installed on the local
or remote computer. As it runs in the background, the TFTP server waits for any
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Performing Additional Tasks
4-53
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
TFTP file transfer request originating from the product unit, and automatically
executes the received request.
A variety of third-party applications, such as 3Cdaemon (available from
www.3com.com) or PumpKIN (available from http://kin.klever.net/pumpkin/),
allow the instant creation of a TFTP server on a client computer. For more
information, refer to the documentation of these applications.
Figure 4-59. Downloading a Software Application File to ASMi-54L via TFTP
Setting-up a TFTP Server
If you use a local laptop and TFTP is the preferred transfer method, a TFTP
server application must be installed on it.
If you are using a third-party application, refer to their setup documentation.
Checking the Firewall Settings
TFTP file transfers use Port 69. Make sure the firewall you are using on the
server computer allows communication through this port.

To allow communication through Port 69 in Windows XP:
1. Double-click the My Network Places icon, located on the desktop.
The My Network Place window appears.
2. On the Network Tasks sidebar, click View network connections.
The available network connections are displayed.
4-54
Performing Additional Tasks
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Figure 4-60. View Network Connections
3. On the Network Tasks sidebar, click Change Windows Firewall settings.
The Windows Firewall dialog box appears.
Figure 4-61. Change Firewall Settings
4. Click the Exceptions tab.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Performing Additional Tasks
4-55
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 4-62. Windows Firewall Dialog Box – Exceptions Tab
5. Check whether Port 69 appears on the exceptions list. If it does not, click
Add Port and add it to the list of exceptions.
Note
Different types of firewalls require different configurations. Refer to the
documentation for your firewall to find out how to transfer TFTP files through
the firewall using a UDP-type port.
Performing a TFTP File Transfer

To transfer files via TFTP:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Utilities>File Transfer>TFTP.
The TFTP screen appears (Figure 4-63). For TFTP file transfer menu
parameters, see Table 4-22.
4-56
Performing Additional Tasks
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
ASMi-54L
Utilities>File Transfer>TFTP
Transfer Status
(no0p)
Transfer Error
(NoError)
1. Command
>
2. Remote File Name
3. Server IP
4. TFTP Total Timeout (ms)[60-240]
…
…
…
(Put your string here)
(0.0.0.0)
(60)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-63. TFTP File Transfer Screen
Table 4-22. TFTP File Transfer Menu Parameters
Parameter
Description
Possible Value
Transfer Status
TFTP file transfer status.
No Operation
Connecting
Transferring data
Ended on
Time out
Ended OK
Error
The status display is
refreshed every one
second.
Transfer Error
TFTP file transfer error
status (if an error has
occurred).
The error status display is
refreshed every one
second.
Unavailable (no router
interface IP)
No error
File not found
Illegal TFTP operation
Unknown transfer ID
Illegal PDU size
Illegal file mode
No empty XC
No empty UDP port
Server overflow
Command
The file transfer command
to be carried out; see
explanation of each
command option in
Table 4-23.
SW Download
SW Download & Reset SW
Upload
Cfg Download
Cfg Upload
Licence Download
Remote File Name
The name of the remote
file to be downloaded /
uploaded (a string).
8 alphanumeric characters;
not case-sensitive
Server IP
The IP address of the server
from/to which the files are
transferred.
0.0.0.0 – 255.255.255.255
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Performing Additional Tasks
4-57
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Description
Possible Value
TFTP Total Timeout
Total timeout period (in
seconds), which is the
maximum time period
allowed for the attempted
transmission.
60-240
Default: 60
2. Select Server IP, and enter the IP address of the TFTP server.
3. Select Remote File Name, and enter a file name on the remote server.
4. Select TFTP Total Timeout, and set the timeout period in seconds.
5. Select Command.
The TFTP File Transfer Options screen is displayed (Figure 4-64).
6. Select a required transfer operation. For more information about each
option, refer to Table 4-23.
Note
• A download option means that a file is to be sent from the local computer
to the product unit.
• An upload option means that a file is to be sent from the product unit to the
local computer.
ASMi-54L starts file transfer.
The TFTP file transfer process is logged with system messages, as follows:
•
TFTP – Starting Upload
•
TFTP – Starting Download
•
TFTP – Upload Failed
•
TFTP – Download Failed.
The messages are stored in the log file (see Chapter 6).
ASMi-54L
Utilities>File Transfer>TFTP>Command
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
SW Download
SW Download & Reset
SW Upload
Cfg Download
Cfg Upload
License Download
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-64. TFTP File Transfer Options
4-58
Performing Additional Tasks
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Table 4-23. TFTP File Transfer Options
Note
Command
Description
SW Download
Download new application files to the unit, for replacing
the currently running application files.
SW Download & Reset
Download new application files to the unit, for replacing
the currently running application files and resetting the
unit.
SW Upload
Upload a software file to a remote server.
Cfg Download
Download a configuration file to the ASMi-54L unit.
Cfg Upload
Upload the unit's configuration file to a remote server.
License Download
Download a license file to the ASMi-54L unit
Once a configuration download is complete, ASMi-54L automatically resets
itself.
Transferring Files via XMODEM
The XMODEM protocol is typically used for local file transfers via the unit's
RS-232 serial interface. The file transfer is performed directly via the RS-232
cable and does not involve either IP-based connectivity or firewall concerns.
Selecting an Operation
The XMODEM file transfer options differ from one product family to another.
The ASMi-54L product family has seven different XMODEM file transfer options,
including license and default configuration download.

To select an XMODEM file transfer option:
1. When logged into the product via HyperTerminal (for more information,
refer to Chapter 3), select Main Menu>Utilities>File Transfer>X-Modem.
The XMODEM file transfer menu is displayed (Figure 4-65). For XMODEM
file transfer menu parameters, refer to Table 4-24.
ASMi-54L
Utilities>File Transfer>X-Modem
Transfer Status
1. Command
()
>
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-65. XMODEM File Transfer Screen
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Performing Additional Tasks
4-59
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Table 4-24. XMODEM File Transfer Menu Parameters
Parameter
Description
Possible Value
Transfer Status
Displays the XMODEM file transfer
status.
No Operation
Connecting
Transferring data
Ended on
Time out
Ended OK
Error
The status display is refreshed every
one second.
Command
The file transfer command to be
carried out; see explanation of each
command option in Table 4-23.
SW Download
SW Download & Reset SW
Upload
Cfg Download
Cfg Upload
License Download
2. In the Local User File Name field, enter the name of the file to be uploaded.
3. Select Command.
The XMODEM File Transfer Options screen is displayed (Figure 4-66).
4. Select a required transfer operation. For more information about each
option, refer to Table 4-23.
Note
• A download option means that a file is to be sent from the local computer
to the unit.
• An upload option means that a file is to be sent from the unit to the local
computer.
ASMi-54L
Utilities>File Transfer>X-Modem>Command
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
SW Download
SW Download & Reset
SW Upload
Cfg Download
Cfg Upload
License Download
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-66. XMODEM File Transfer Options
Note
4-60
Once a configuration download is complete, ASMi-54L automatically resets
itself.
Performing Additional Tasks
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Sending a File to the Unit
The actual XMODEM file transfer is invoked manually from the HyperTerminal
Transfer menu.

To send a file from the local computer to the product unit:
1. From the Transfer menu, select Send File.
The Send File dialog box appears.
Figure 4-67. HyperTerminal Transfer Menu – Send File
2. From the Protocol drop-down list, select Xmodem.
Figure 4-68. Send File Dialog Box – Selecting Xmodem
3. Click Browse and locate the path of the file that needs to be transferred.
Figure 4-69. Send File Dialog Box – File Specified
4. Click Send.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Performing Additional Tasks
4-61
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
The specified file is sent to the product unit.
Receiving Files from the Unit
The same as the Send operation, but in reverse, the actual Receive operation is
also invoked manually.

To receive a file from the unit at the local computer:
1. From the Transfer menu, select Receive File.
The Receive File dialog box appears.
Figure 4-70. Receive File Dialog Box
2. From the Protocol drop-down list, select Xmodem.
Figure 4-71. Receive File Dialog Box
3. Click Browse to define the local directory into which the file needs to be
transferred.
4. Click Receive.
The specified file is received from the product unit to the local
computer.
Displaying and Clearing a File Transfer Statistics

To display a file transfer statistics:
•
Select Main menu>Utilities>File Transfer>Show Statistics.
The Show Statistics screen appears (Figure 4-72).
The Show Statistics screen displays the file transfer performance
statistics per protocol (TFTP, XMODEM, and HTTP) as follows:
4-62
Performing Additional Tasks
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
START – the number of started file transfer operations

END–OK – the number of file transfer operations successfully
completed

FAILED – the number of uncompleted (failed) file transfer
operations.

ASMi-54L
Utilities>File Transfer>Show Statistics
PROTOCOL
FAILED
TFTP
XMODEM
HTTP 0
START
END-OK
0 0
0 0
0 0
0
0
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-72. Show Statistics Screen

To clear a file transfer statistics:
•
Select Main menu>Utilities>File Transfer>Clear Statistics.
The File Transfer statistics is cleared.
Resetting ASMi-54L
This section describes the three types of Resets:
•
Resetting configuration parameters to default settings
•
Resetting the unit
•
Resetting the PCS.
Resetting to the Default Settings
You can reset the unit to its default settings including or excluding
management parameters.

To reset to the default settings:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Configuration>System (Figure 4-73).
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Performing Additional Tasks
4-63
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Management >
Fault Propagation
Terminal
Date and Time
Factory Defaults
Factory Defaults w/o Management
>
>
>
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-73. Configuration–System Screen
Note
For ASMi-54L units with E1 option, the Configuration–System screen includes
the Clock parameter.
2. In the Configuration–System screen, select Factory Defaults.
The following message appears:
The device will restart with default configuration. Proceed?
(Y/N)
3. Press <Y> to confirm the reset.
All parameters are reset to their default settings, and the unit is reset.

To reset to the default settings without management parameters:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Configuration>System (Figure 4-73).
2. In the Configuration–System screen, select Factory Defaults w/o
Management.
The following message appears:
The device will restart with default values
except of management. Proceed? (Y/N)
3. Press <Y> to confirm the reset.
All parameters (except for IP address, Mask, Default Gateway, Read
community, Write community, Trap community, and Manager List) are
reset to their default settings, and the unit is reset.
Resetting the Unit
You can perform an overall reset of the unit.

To reset ASMi-54L:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Utilities (Figure 4-74).
4-64
Performing Additional Tasks
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
ASMi-54L
Utilities
1.
2.
3.
4.
File Transfer
License Management
Reset Device
Reset PCS
>
>
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 4-74. Utilities Screen
2. In the Utilities screen, select Reset Device.
The following confirmation message appears:
The device will restart. Do you want to proceed? (Y/N).
3. Press <Y> to confirm the reset.
The device resets itself.
Resetting the PCS
You can perform a reset of the PCS.

To reset the PCS:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Utilities (Figure 4-74).
2. In the Utilities screen, select Reset PCS.
The following confirmation message appears:
The PCS will restart. Do you want to proceed? (Y/N)
3. Press <Y> to confirm the reset.
The PCS resets.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Performing Additional Tasks
4-65
Chapter 4 Configuration
4-66
Performing Additional Tasks
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Chapter 5
Monitoring and
Diagnostics
This section describes how to:
•
Monitor system performance
•
Display physical level status and statistics
•
Display application level status
•
Display system messages
•
Detect errors
•
Troubleshoot the device
•
Perform connectivity and performance tests.
5.1
Monitoring Performance
The software provides access to the following status information:
•
System level – Event Log file
•
Physical level – Ethernet and SHDSL port status
•
Application level – MAC table.
The status information is available via the Monitoring menu.
Displaying System Information
The System menu shows the interface connection status and Event Log file. For a
description of system messages, which are displayed via the Event Log file, refer
to Handling Alarms.

To display interface connection information:
1. Select Main Menu>Monitoring>System.
The Monitoring System screen appears (see Figure 5-1).
2.
On the Monitoring System screen, select Interface Status.
The Interface Status screen appears (see Figure 5-2). The parameters are
described in Table 5-1.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Monitoring Performance
5-1
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>System
MAC Address
System UpTime
System Date
System Time
1. Interface Status
2. Event Log
3. Date and Time
(00-20-D2-50-15-B5)
(18:03:30)
... (0000-00-00)
... (18:03:30)
[]
[]
>
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-1. Monitoring System Screen
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>System>Interface Status
Description
Type
ETH Port 1
Fast Eth
ETH Port 2
Fast Eth
ETH Port 3
Fast Eth
ETH Port 4
Fast Eth
E1 Port 1
E1 Port
Rem E1 Port 1
E1 Port
SHDSL Port 1
Multirate HDSL2
Rem SHDSL Port 1
Multirate HDSL2
Bridge Port 1
Bridge Port
Bridge Port 2
Bridge Port
Bridge Port 3
Bridge Port
Bridge Port 4
Bridge Port
Bridge Port 5
Bridge Port
Bridge Port 6
Bridge Port
Activation
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Down
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Down
Up
Up
Down
Operation
Speed
100000000
0
100000000
100000000
1984000
1984000
2048000
2048000
0
100000000
0
100000000
100000000
0
r-Refresh Table
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-2. Interface Status Screen
Table 5-1. Interface Status Parameters
5-2
Parameter
Description
Description
Ethernet, Bridge, local/remote SHDSL, and local/remote E1 port
Type
The type of the interface
Activation
Whether the interface is enabled (Up) or disabled (Down), as defined
by user in the Ethernet and SHDSL menus (see Chapter 4).
Operation
Actual operational status of the link (Up or Down).
Speed
Actual speed of the interface.
Monitoring Performance
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Displaying Physical Layer Information
You can view the status of the unit’s physical layer.
For a description of the Ethernet, E1, and SHDSL port statistics, refer to
Displaying Interface Statistics.
Displaying the Ethernet Port Status

To display the Ethernet port status:
1. Select Monitoring>Physical layer>Ethernet.
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical layer>Ethernet
1. Status
2. Statistics
>
>
C-Clear All Ethernet Ports Statistics
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-3. Monitoring Physical Layer - Ethernet Screen
2.
Select Status.
The Ethernet Status screen appears (see Figure 5-4). The parameters are
described in Table 5-2.
3. Press <F> to select the Port number.
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical layer>Ethernet>Status
1. Fast Ethernet Port
(1)
Administrative Status
Operation Status
Speed & Duplex
Flow Control
(Up)
(Up)
(100mbps – Full Duplex)
(Enable)
F – Forward; B - Backward
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-4. Ethernet Status Screen
Table 5-2. Ethernet Status Parameters
Parameter
Description
Fast Ethernet Port
The port slot number to be handled.
Connector Type
The physical connector type (RJ45, SFP-In, or SFP-Out).
Admistrative Status
Whether the interface is enabled (up) or disabled (down).
Operation Status
The actual operational status of the link (up or down).
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Monitoring Performance
5-3
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Description
Speed & Duplex
The current data rate and duplex mode of the link defined
by the auto negotiation or by the static configuration
(100 – full, 100 – half, 10 – full, or 10 - half).
Flow Control
The actual flow control status defined according to the auto
negotiation (enabled or disabled).
Displaying the Link OAM Status

To display the Link OAM status:
1. Select Main Menu>Monitoring>Application>Link OAM.
The Monitoring Link OAM Status screen appears (see Figure 5-5).
2.
Select Status.
The Link OAM Status screen appears (see Figure 5-6). The parameters are
described in Table 5-3.
3. Press <F> to select the Port number.
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Application>Link OAM
1. Status
2. Statistics
>
>
F-Forward Port; B-Backward Port; C-Clear counters
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-5. Monitoring Link OAM Screen
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Application>Link OAM>Status
SHDSL Port
Oper Status>
Loopback St>
(1)
(Link Fault)
(No Loop)
Local Information:
MAC Address
…
OAM Mode
>
Unidirectional Support >
Vars Retrieval
>
Link Events
>
Loopback
>
PDU Size
…
0020D2345687
(Passive)
(Supp)
(Supp)
(Supp)
(Supp)
(64)
Remote Information:
MAC Address
… 0020D225224C
OAM Mode
> (Unknown)
Unidirectional Support > (Supp)
Vars Retrieval
> (Supp)
Link Events
> (Supp)
Loopback
> (Supp)
PDU Size
…
(64)
Vendor OUI
>
r-Refresh Table
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
…
(0020D2)
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-6. Link OAM Status Screen
5-4
Monitoring Performance
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Table 5-3. Link OAM Status Parameters
Parameter
Values
Comments
Port Number
1 – Max number of
OAM-compatible ports
The port used in OAM session.
Operational Status
Loopback Status
Local Mac Address
Default: First defined port
Disabled
Fail
Passive Wait
Send Local
Send Local Rem
Send Local Rem OK
Locally Rejected
Remotly Rejected
Operational
Not Oper. Half Duplex.
The status of the local OAM state
machine
noLoopback
remLoopback
locLoopback
The loopback status of the OAM Link
Legal MAC addres
value
The local port MAC address
Note: The parameter appears only when
802.3ah OAM is enabled on this port.
Note: The parameter appears only when
802.3ah OAM is enabled.
Default: 00-00-00-00-00-00
Note: The parameter appears only when
802.3ah OAM is enabled.
Remote Mac Address
Legal MAC addres
value
The remote device MAC address
Default: 00-00-00-00-00-00
Note: The parameter appears only when
802.3ah OAM is enabled.
Local OAM Mode
Remote OAM Mode
Local Unidirectional
Support
Unknown
Passive
Active
The local device OAM mode
Default: Unknown
Note: The parameter appears only when
802.3ah OAM is enabled on this port.
Unknown
Passive
Active
The remote device OAM mode
Not supported
Supported
Displays whether the local device
supports Unidirectional Transmission
Default: Unknown
Note: The parameter appears only when
802.3ah OAM is enabled.
Default: Not supported
Note: The parameter appears only when
802.3ah OAM is enabled on this port.
Remote
Unidirectional
Support
Not supported
Supported
Displays whether the remote device
supports Unidirectional Transmission
Default: Not supported
Note: The parameter appears only when
802.3ah OAM is enabled.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Monitoring Performance
5-5
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Values
Comments
Local Vars Retrieval
Support
Not supported
Supported
Displays whether the local device
supports Variable Retrieval
Default: Not supported
Note: The parameter appears only when
802.3ah OAM is enabled.
Remote Vars
Retrieval Support
Not supported
Supported
Displays whether the remote device
supports Variable Retrieval
Default: Not supported
Note: The parameter appears only when
802.3ah OAM is enabled.
Local Link Events
Not supported
Supported
Displays whether the local device
supports link events
Default: Not supported
Note: The parameter appears only when
802.3ah OAM is enabled.
Remote Link Events
Not supported
Supported
Displays whether the remote device
supports link events
Default: Not supported
Note: The parameter appears only when
802.3ah OAM is enabled.
Local Loopback
Support
Not supported
Supported
Displays whether the local device
supports the loopback
Default: Not supported
Note: The parameter appears only when
802.3ah OAM is enabled.
Remote Loopback
Support
Not supported
Supported
Displays whether the remote device
supports the loopback
Default: Not supported
Note: The parameter appears only when
802.3ah OAM is enabled.
Local PDU Size
RAD or Vendor ID
The packet size supported by local
element
Default: 64
Note: The parameter appears only when
802.3ah OAM is enabled on this port and
element is in debug mode.
Remote PDU Size
Unsigned32
The packet size supported by remote
element
Default: 64
Note: The parameter appears only when
802.3ah OAM is enabled on this port and
element is in debug mode.
5-6
Monitoring Performance
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Parameter
Values
Comments
Remote Vendor OUI
Vendor ID
Vendor ID
Default: 000000
Note: The parameter appears only when
802.3ah OAM is enabled.
Displaying the E1 Port Status

To display the E1 port status:
•
Select Main Menu>Monitoring>Physical layer>E1>Status.
The E1 Status screen appears (see Figure 5-7). The parameters are
described in Table 5-4.
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical layer>E1>Status
Port
(1)
Administrative Status
Operational Status
(Up)
(Up)
>
ESC-Previous menu; !-Main Menu; &-Exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-7. E1 Status Screen
Table 5-4. E1 Status Parameters
Parameter
Description
Port
The E1 port number to be handled.
Admistrative Status
Whether the interface is enabled (up) or disabled (down).
Operational Status
The actual operational status of the link (up or down).
Displaying the SHDSL Port Status

To display the SHDSL port status:
•
Select Monitoring>Physical layer>SHDSL>Status.
The SHDSL Port Status screen appears (see Figure 5-8). The parameters
are described in Table 5-5.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Monitoring Performance
5-7
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical layer>SHDSL>Status
Number of repeaters
(2)
1. Line
2. PCS
>
>
>
ESC-Previous menu; !-Main Menu; &-Exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-8. SHDSL Port Status Screen
Table 5-5. SHDSL Port Status Parameters
Parameter
Description
Number of repeaters
Number of repeaters recognized in the span (only for HDLC
mode)
Line
The Line submenu; opens the SHDSL Line Status screen.
PCS
The PCS submenu; opens the SHDSL PCS Status screen.
Displaying the SHDSL Line Status

To display the SHDSL line status:
1. Select Main Menu>Monitoring>Physical layer>SHDSL>Status>Line.
The SHDSL Line Status screen appears (see Figure 5-9).
2. Toggle between the Near-end and Far-end screens using the Forward and
Backward commands. The parameters are described in Table 5-6.
5-8
Monitoring Performance
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical layer>SHDSL>Status>Line
Line
Wires
Unit
(1)
(1)
(Near End )
Administrative Status
Operation Status
Wiring
TC Layer
SHDSL Mode
PSD Mask
SHDSL Transmission Mode
Payload Rate
State
Current SNR Margin
Current Loop Attenuation
Current Power Backoff
1. Remote Terminal Connection
2. Repeaters
(Up)
(Up)
(2 Wire)
(64-65-Octet)
(STU-C)
(Symmetric)
(Annex B/G)
(2048kbps)
(Data)
(16dB)
(0.4dB)
(0dB)
(Disconnect)
>
F-Forwards ; B-backwards
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-9. SHDSL Line Status Screen – Near End (CO)
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical layer>SHDSL>Status>Line
Line
Wires
Unit
(1)
(1)
(Far End )
Administrative Status
Operation Status
Wiring
TC Layer
SHDSL Mode
PSD Mask
SHDSL Transmission Mode
Payload Rate
State
Current SNR Margin
Current Loop Attenuation
Current Power Backoff
(Up)
(Up)
(2 Wire)
(64-65-Octet)
(STU-C)
(Symmetric)
(Annex B/G)
(2048kbps)
(Data)
(16dB)
(0.4dB)
(0dB)
>
F-Forwards ; B-backwards
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-10. SHDSL Line Status Screen – Far End (CO and CPE)
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Monitoring Performance
5-9
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Notes
Installation and Operation Manual
• The Remote Terminal Connection parameter appears when EOC is Established
to the CPE device.
• The Repeaters parameter appears when at least one repeater is present.
The parameter is relevant only for HDLC and CO modes.
Table 5-6. SHDSL Line Status Parameters
Parameter
Description
Line
The identifying number of SHDSL line.
Wires
The number of wire pairs in the SHDSL line.
Unit
Near=Local or Far=Remote End device
Admistrative Status
Whether the interface is up or down.
Operational Status
The actual operational status of the SHDSL PCS
(up or down).
Wiring
The number of wires on the SHDSL port.
TC Layer
TC layer mode of SHDSL.
SHDSL Mode
Operational mode of SHDSL.
PSD Mask
Using symmetric/asymmetric Power Spectral Density (PSD)
Mask for the associated SHDSL line.
SHDSL Transmission Mode
The current Power Spectral Density (PSD) regional setting of
the SHDSL span.
Payload Rate
The actual PME rate.
State
The current operational state of the SHDSL line.
Current SNR Margin
The current SNR margin for this endpoint.
Current Loop Attenuation
The current loop attenuation for this endpoint.
Current Power Backoff
The current transmit power in tenth of dBm.
Remote Terminal
Connection
The current status of the virtual connection with an FF
device. (CPE)
Note: Only configurable for the local CO device.
Repeaters

The Repeaters submenu; opens the SHDSL Line Repeaters
Status screen
To display the SHDSL line repeaters status:
•
Select Main Menu>Monitoring>Physical layer>SHDSL>Status>Line>Repeaters.
The SHDSL Line Repeaters Status screen appears (see Figure 5-11). The
parameters are described in Table 5-7.
5-10
Monitoring Performance
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical layer>SHDSL>Status>Line>Repeaters
Repeater
(1)
Current SNR Margin Network side
Current SNR Margin Customer side
Current Loop Attenuation Network side
Current Loop Attenuation Customer side
1. Repeater Terminal Connect
(16dB)
(16dB)
(0dB)
(0dB)
(Disconnect)
>
F-Forwards ; B-backwards
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-11. SHDSL Line Status Screen
Table 5-7. SHDSL Line Status Parameters
Parameter
Description
Current SNR Margin
Network side
The current SNR margin for the local (network) endpoint.
Current SNR Margin
Customer side
The current SNR margin for the remote (customer)
endpoint.
Current Loop Attenuation
Network side
The current loop attenuation for the local (network)
endpoint.
Current Loop Attenuation
Customer side
The current loop attenuation for the remote (customer)
endpoint.
Repeater Terminal
Connect
The current status of the virtual connection of the repeater
with a terminal.
Displaying the SHDSL PCS Status

To display the SHDSL PCS status:
•
Select Main Menu>Monitoring>Physical layer>SHDSL>Status>PCS.
The SHDSL PCS Status screen appears. The parameters are described in
Table 5-8 .
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical layer>SHDSL>Status>PCS
PCS (Physical Coding Sublayer)Number (1)
Administrative Status
Operation Status
Lines
(Up)
(Down)
(1,2)
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-12. SHDSL PCS Status Screen3
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Monitoring Performance
5-11
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Installation and Operation Manual
Table 5-8. SHDSL PCS Status Parameters
Parameter
Description
PCS (Physical Coding
Sublayer)
The number of SHDSL PCS showing its status.
Administrative Status
Whether the interface is enabled (up) or disabled (down).
Operation Status
The actual operational status of the SHDSL PCS
(up or down).
Lines
The number of lines in the bond.
Displaying Application Level Status
At the application level, the unit provides information of the MAC addresses and
their bridge port assignments.

To display the MAC table:
1. Select Main Menu>Monitoring>Application.
The Monitoring Application screen appears (see Figure 5-13).
2. Select Bridge.
The Monitoring Application - Bridge screen appears (see Figure 5-14).
3. Select View MAC Table.
The MAC Table screen appears (see Figure 5-15). The parameters are
described in Table 5-9 .
ASMi-54L
Main Menu>Monitoring>Application
1. Bridge
2. Link OAM
>
>
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-13. Monitoring Application Screen
ASMi-54L
Main Menu>Monitoring>Application>Bridge
1. View MAC Table
[]
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-14. Monitoring Application - Bridge Screen
5-12
Monitoring Performance
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Application>Bridge>View MAC Table
1
| 2
V 3
4
5
Vlan ID
MAC Address
10
11
10
10
13
111111111111
222222222222
333333333333
444444444444
555555555555
Bridge port
Status
1
2
3
3
5
Static
Dynamic
Static
Dynamic
Dynamic
>
r-Refresh Table
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-15. View MAC Table
Table 5-9. View MAC Table Parameters
Note
Parameter
Description
VLAN ID
ID of VLAN to which the entry belongs.
MAC Address
The destination MAC address in a frame to which this
entry's filtering information applies.
Bridge port
The port number of the port from which a frame must be
received in order for this entry's filtering information to
apply.
Status
The status of the entry (Static or Dynamic).
VLAN ID parameter appears in the VLAN Aware mode only.
Displaying Interface Statistics
You can display statistical data for the Ethernet, SHDSL, and E1 ports.
Displaying Ethernet Port Statistics
You can display statistical data for the Ethernet ports.

To view Ethernet statistics:
1. Select Monitoring>Physical Layer>Ethernet>Statistics.
The Ethernet Statistics screen appears. The parameters are described in
Table 5-10.
2. Press <F> to select the Port number.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Monitoring Performance
5-13
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical Layer>Ethernet>Statistics
Port
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
In
In
In
In
In
In
Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx
(1)
Total Frames
Total Octets
Correct Frames
FCS Errors
Jabber Errors
Fragments Errors
Pause Frames
Undersized Errors
Oversized Errors
Discard Frames
Errors
Unicast Frames
MultiCast Frames
Broadcast Frames
64 Octets
65-127 Octets
128-255 Octets
256-511 Octets
512-1023 Octets
1024-long Octets
Total Frames
Total Octets
Correct Frames
Collisions
Discard Frames
Unicast Frames
MultiCast Frames
Broadcast Frames
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
F-Forward; B-Backward; C-Clear Statistics
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-16. Ethernet Statistics Screen
Table 5-10. Ethernet Statistics Parameters
5-14
Parameter
Description
Port
The selected port slot number.
Rx Total Frames
The total number of frames received.
Rx Total Octets
The total number of octets (bytes) received.
Rx Correct Frames
The number of correct frames received.
Rx FCS Errors
The number of frames with FCS errors received by this
port.
Monitoring Performance
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Parameter
Description
Rx Jabber Errors
The number of received packets meeting the following
conditions:
Rx Fragments Errors
•
Packet data length is greater than 1518/1536 bytes
•
Packet has invalid CRC.
The number of received packets meeting the following
conditions:
•
Packet data length is less than 64 bytes
•
Packet has invalid CRC
•
Collision event has not been detected
•
Late collision event has not been detected.
Rx Pause Frames
The total number of pause frames received.
Rx Errors
The total number of error frames received.
RX Undersize Errors
The total number of frames received with a length less than
64 octets but with a valid FCS.
Rx Oversize Errors
The total number of frames received with a length greater
than maximum size octets but with a valid FCS.
Rx Discard Frames
The total number of valid frames received that are
discarded due to a lack of buffer space, including frames
discarded at ingress and frames dropped due to priority,
and congestion considerations at the output queues.
Rx Unicast Frames
The number of good unicast packets received.
Rx Multicast Frames
The number of good multicast packets received.
Rx Broadcast Frames
The number of good broadcast packets received.
In 64 Octets
The number of received packets with a size of 64 bytes.
In 65-127 Octets
The number of received packets with a size of 65 to 127
bytes.
In 128-255 Octets
The number of received packets with a size of 128 to 255
bytes.
In 256-511 Octets
The number of received packets with a size of 256 to 511
bytes.
In 512-1023 Octets
The number of received packets with a size of 512 to 1023
bytes.
In 1024-long Octets
The number of received packets with a size of 1024 to
1518/1536 bytes.
Tx Total Frames
The total number of frames transmitted.
Tx Total Octets
The total number of octets (bytes) transmitted.
Tx Correct Frames
The number of frames successfully transmitted.
Tx Collision
The number of transmission attempts that experienced a
collision.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Monitoring Performance
5-15
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Note
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Description
Tx Discard Frames
Total Tx frames discarded due to a lack of buffer space.
Tx Unicast Frames
The number of good unicast packets transmitted.
Tx Multicast Frames
The number of good multicast packets transmitted.
Tx Broadcast Frames
The number of good broadcast packets transmitted.
All counters are 32 bits.
Displaying Link OAM Statistics

To view Link OAM statistics:
1. Select Monitoring>Application>Link OAM>Statistics.
The Link OAM Statistics screen appears. The parameters are described in
Table 5-11.
2. Press <F> to select the Port number.
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Application>Link OAM>Statistics
SHDSL Port
OAM Mode
Link OAM Version
...
...
(1)
(Passive)
(1.0)
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
...
...
...
...
...
...
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
...
(0)
Information
Var Request
Var Response
Loopback Ctrl
Event Notification
Org Specific
Rx Unrecognized
Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx
Information
... (0)
Var Request
... (0)
Var Response
... (0)
Loopback Ctrl
... (0)
Event Notification...(0)
Org Specific
... (0)
>
F-Forward; B-Backward; C-Clear Counters
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-17. Ethernet Link OAM Statistics Screen
Table 5-11. Ethernet Link OAM Statistics Parameters
Parameter
Description
SHDSL Port
The port that will be used in OAM session.
OAM Mode
The local device OAM mode (Passive or Active).
Note: This parameter appears when Descriptor is configured
for the port and the port is enabled.
Rx/Tx Information
The counter of received/transmitted OAM Information
messages.
Note: This parameter appears when 802.3ah OAM is enabled
5-16
Monitoring Performance
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Description
on this port.
Note
Rx/Tx Var Request
The counter of received/transmitted OAM Variable Request
messages.
Rx/Tx Var Response
The counter of received/transmitted OAM Variable Response
messages.
Rx/Tx Loopback Ctrl
The counter of received/transmitted OAM Loopback Control
messages.
Rx/Tx Event Notification
The counter of received/transmitted OAM event notification
messages.
Rx/Tx Org Specific
The counter of received/transmitted OAM Organization
Specific messages.
Rx Unsupported
The counter of received OAM messages with unrecognized
codes.
All counters are 32 bits.
Clearing Ethernet Port Statistics

To clear all Ethernet, SHDSL, and E1 statistics:
•

To clear all Ethernet statistics:
•

In the Monitoring>Physical Layer screen, press <C> to clear all physical port
statistics.
In the Monitoring>Physical Layer>Ethernet screen (see Figure 5-3), press <C>
to clear all Ethernet statistics.
To clear the Ethernet port statistics:
•
In the Monitoring>Ethernet>Statistics screen (see Figure 5-16), press <C> to
clear the selected Ethernet port statistics.
Displaying E1 Port Statistics

To display the E1 port statistics:
•
Select Monitoring>Physical Layer>E1>Statistics.
The E1 Statistics screen appears.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Monitoring Performance
5-17
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical Layer>E1>Statistics
Port
Unit
(1)
(Near End)
1. Current Interval
2. 15 Min. Intervals
3. Current Day Interval
>
>
>
>
C-Clear Statistics
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-18. E1 Statistics Screen
Displaying E1 Current Interval Statistics

To view the E1 current interval statistics:
•
In the E1 Statistics screen, select Current Interval.
The E1 Current Interval screen appears (see Figure 5-19). The parameters
are described in Table 5-12.
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical Layer>E1>Statistics>Current Interval
Port
Unit
(1)
(Near End)
ES
SES
UAS
BES
LOFC
CSS
Current Timer
Number of 15 min intervals
(0)
(0)
(895)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(895)
(3)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-19. E1 Current Interval Screen
Displaying E1 15 Minute Interval Statistics

To view the E1 15 minute interval statistics:
•
In the E1 Statistics screen, select 15 Minute Intervals.
The E1 15 Minute Intervals screen appears (see Figure 5-20). The
parameters are described in Table 5-12.
5-18
Monitoring Performance
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical Layer>E1>Statistics>15 Min. Intervals
Port
Unit
Interval Number [1-96]
ES
SES
UAS
BES
LOFC
CSS
1. Choise interval number ...
(1)
(Near End)
(1)
(0)
(0)
(900)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(1)
>
F-Forward; ^F-Frw(Int); ^B-Bkw(Int)
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-20. 15 Minute Intervals Screen
Displaying E1 Current Day Interval Statistics

To view the current day interval:
•
In the E1 Statistics screen, select Current Day Interval.
The E1 Current Day Interval screen appears (see Figure 5-21). The
parameters are described in Table 5-12.
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical Layer>E1>Statistics>Current Day Interval
Port
Unit
(1)
(Near End)
ES
SES
UAS
BES
LOFC
CSS
(0)
(0)
(3599)
(0)
(0)
(0)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-21. Current Day Interval Screen
Table 5-12. E1 Current Statistics Parameters
Parameter
Description
Port
The E1 port number to be handled.
Unit
Near=Local or Far=Remote End device
Interval Number
Interval number (for 15-minute interval only).
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Monitoring Performance
5-19
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Description
ES
The number of Errored Seconds.
SES
The number of Severely Errored Seconds.
UAS
The number of Unavailable Seconds.
BES
The number of Bursty Errored Seconds.
LOFC
The number of loss of frame events encountered in the current
15-minute interval.
CSS
The number of Controlled Slip Seconds.
Current Timer
The number of seconds that have elapsed since the beginning
of the current error-measurement period.
Displaying SHDSL Port Statistics

To display the SHDSL port statistics:
•
Select Monitoring>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Statistics.
The SHDSL Statistics screen appears (see Figure 5-22).
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Statistics
1. Line
2. PCS/HDLC
>
>
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-22. SHDSL Statistics Screen
Note
“PCS” stands for the 64-65 octets type of TC layer (EFM) while ”HDLC” stands for
the HDLC type of TC layer.
Displaying SHDSL Line Statistics
SHDSL line statistics can be displayed for the following intervals: current intervals,
15-minute intervals, current day intervals, day intervals, and accumulated data.

To view SHDSL line port statistics:
•
Select Monitoring>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Statistics>Line.
The SHDSL Line Statistics screen appears (see Figure 5-23). The statistics
are described in Table 5-13.
5-20
Monitoring Performance
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Statistics>Line
Line
Wires
Unit
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
(1)
(1)
(Near End )
Current Interval
15 Min. Intervals
Current Day Interval
Day Intervals
Accumulated Data
>
>
>
>
>
F-Forwards; B-backwards; C-Clear Statistics
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-23. SHDSL Line Statistics Screen – Near End
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Statistics>Line
Line
Wires
Unit
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
(1)
(1)
(Far End )
Current Interval
15 Min. Intervals
Current Day Interval
Day Intervals
Accumulated Data
>
>
>
>
>
F-Forwards; B-backwards; C-Clear Statistics
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-24. SHDSL Line Statistics Screen – Far End
Table 5-13. SHDSL Line Statistics Parameters
Parameter
Description
Line
The selected line number.
Wires
The number of the wired pairs.
Current Interval
The statistics counters in the current 15-minute interval.
15 Min. Intervals
The statistics counters in intervals of 15 minutes.
Current Day Interval
The statistics counters in the current 1-day interval.
Day Intervals
The statistics counters in intervals of 1 day.
Accumulated Data
Accumulated statistics counters.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Monitoring Performance
5-21
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Installation and Operation Manual
Displaying SHDSL Current Interval Statistics

To view SHDSL Current Interval statistics:
•
Select Main Menu>Monitoring>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Statistics>Line>Current
Interval.
The SHDSL Current Interval Statistics screen appears (see Figure 5-25).
The statistics are described in Table 5-14.
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Statistics>Line>Current
Interval
Line
Wires
(1)
(1)
ES
UAS
SES
LOSWS
CRC anomalies
Elapsed Time
Number of 15 min intervals
Number of 1 day intervals
(0)
(431)
(431)
(0)
(0)
(431)
(4)
(0)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-25. SHDSL Current Interval Statistics Screen
Table 5-14. SHDSL Current Interval Statistics Parameters
5-22
Parameter
Description
Line
The selected line number.
Wires
The number of the wired pairs.
ES
The number of Errored Seconds (ES) in the current
15-minute interval.
UAS
The number of Unavailable Seconds (UAS) in the current
15-minute interval.
SES
The number of Severely Errored Seconds (SES) in the
current 15-minute interval.
LOSWS
The number of Count of Loss of Sync Word (LOSW) Seconds
in the current 15-minute interval.
CRC Anomalies
The number of CRC anomalies in the current 15-minute
interval.
Elapsed Time
The total number of elapsed seconds in the current 15minute interval
Number of 15 min intervals
The number of 15-minute intervals collected during the
current interval.
Monitoring Performance
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Parameter
Description
Number of 1 day intervals
The number of 1-day intervals collected during the current
interval.
Displaying SHDSL 15-Minute Interval Statistics

To view SHDSL 15-minute interval statistics:
1. Select Main Menu>Monitoring>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Statistics>Line>15 Min.
Intervals.
The SHDSL 15 Minute Intervals Statistics screen appears (see
Figure 5-26). The statistics are described in Table 5-15.
2. Press <F> to select the line number.
3. Press <^F> to select the Interval number.
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Statistics>Line>15 Min Intervals
Line
Wires
Interval Number [1-96]
ES
UAS
SES
LOSWS
CRC Anomalies
1. Choose interval number
(1)
(1)
(1)
(0)
(900)
(900)
(0)
(0)
… (1)
>
^F-Frw(Int); ^B-Bkw(Int)
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-26. SHDSL 15 Minute Intervals Statistics Screen
Table 5-15. SHDSL 15 Minute Intervals Statistics Parameters
Parameter
Description
Line
The selected line number.
Wires
The number of the wired pairs.
Interval Number
The Performance Data Interval number.
ES
The number of Errored Seconds (ES) during the interval.
UAS
The number of unavailable Seconds (UAS) during the interval.
SES
The number of Severely Errored Seconds (ES) during the interval.
LOSWS
The number of Loss of Sync Word (LOSW) Seconds during the interval.
CRC Anomalies
The number of CRC anomalies during the interval.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Monitoring Performance
5-23
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Installation and Operation Manual
Displaying SHDSL Current Day Interval Statistics

To view SHDSL Current Day Interval statistics:
•
Select Main Menu>Monitoring>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Statistics>Line>Current
Day Intervals.
The SHDSL Current Day Interval Statistics screen appears (see
Figure 5-27). The statistics are described in Table 5-16.
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Statistics>Line>Current Day
Interval
Line
Wires
(1)
(1)
ES
UAS
SES
LOSWS
CRC Anomalies
Elapsed Time
Number of 1 day intervals
(3)
(526)
(521)
(32)
(10)
(82683)
(1)
>
F-Forward, B-Backward
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-27. SHDSL Current Day Interval Statistics Screen
Table 5-16. SHDSL Current Day Interval Statistics Parameters
5-24
Parameter
Description
Line
The selected line number.
Wires
The number of the wired pairs.
ES
The number of Errored Seconds (ES) during the current day.
UAS
The number of unavailable Seconds (UAS) during the current day.
SES
The number of Severely Errored Seconds (ES) during the current day.
LOSWS
The number of Loss of Sync Word (LOSW) Seconds during the
current day.
CRC Anomalies
The number of CRC anomalies during the current day.
Elapsed Time
The number of seconds that have elapsed since the beginning of the
current 1-day interval.
Number of 1 day
intervals
The number of 1-day intervals collected during the current day.
Monitoring Performance
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Displaying SHDSL Day Intervals Statistics

To view SHDSL Day Intervals statistics:
1. Select Main Menu>Monitoring>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Statistics>Line>Day
Intervals.
The SHDSL Day Intervals Statistics screen appears (see Figure 5-28). The
statistics are described in Table 5-17.
2. Press <F> to select the line number.
3. Press <^F> to select the Interval number.
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Statistics>Day Intervals
Line
Wires
Interval Number[1-7]
(1)
(1)
(1)
ES
UAS
SES
LOSWS
CRC Anomalies
(2)
(5911)
(5889)
(130)
(0)
>
F-Forward, B-Backward
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-28. SHDSL Day Intervals Statistics Screen
Table 5-17. SHDSL Day Intervals Statistics Parameters
Parameter
Description
Line
The selected line number.
Wires
The number of the wired pairs.
Interval Number
The History Data Interval number.
ES
The number of Errored Seconds (ES) during the 1-day interval.
UAS
The number of Unavailable Seconds (UAS) during the 1-day interval.
SES
The number of Severely Errored Seconds (ES) during the 1-day interval.
LOSWS
The number of Loss of Sync Word (LOSW) Seconds during the 1-day
interval.
CRC Anomalies
The number of CRC anomalies during the 1-day interval.
Displaying SHDSL Accumulated Data Statistics

To view SHDSL Accumulated Data statistics:
1. Select Main Menu>Monitoring>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Statistics>Accumulated
Data.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Monitoring Performance
5-25
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Installation and Operation Manual
The SHDSL Accumulated Data Statistics screen appears (see Figure 5-29).
The statistics are described in Table 5-18.
2. Press <F> to select the line number.
3. Press <^F> to select the Interval number.
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Statistics>Line>Accumulated
Data
Line (1)
Wires (1)
ES
(0)
UAS
(4551)
SES
(4551)
LOSWS
CRC Anomalies
Accumulated Time
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
(0)
(0)
(4551)
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-29. SHDSL Line Accumulated Data Statistics Screen
Table 5-18. SHDSL Line Accumulated Data Statistics Parameters
Parameter
Description
Line
The selected line number.
Wires
The number of the wired pairs.
ES
The number of Errored Seconds (ES) on this endpoint since it was
last restarted.
UAS
The number of Unavailable Seconds (UAS) on this endpoint since it
was last restarted.
SES
The number of Severely Errored Seconds (SES) on this endpoint
since it was last restarted.
LOSWS
The number of Loss of Sync Word (LOSW) Seconds on this endpoint
since it was last restarted.
CRC Anomalies
The number of CRC anomalies on this endpoint since it was last
restarted.
Accumulated Time
The time (in hundredths of a second) since the accumulated
counters were last re-initialized.
Displaying SHDSL PCS/HDLC Port Statistics

To view SHDSL PCS/HDLC port statistics:
1. Select Main Menu>Monitoring>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Statistics>PCS/HDLC
Statistics.
5-26
Monitoring Performance
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
The SHDSL PCS/HDLC Statistics screen appears (see Figure 5-30 and
Figure 5-31). The statistics are described in Table 5-19.
2. Press <F> to select the PCS number.
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Statistics>PCS
PCS (Physical Coding Sublayer) Number
(1)
TX Total Frames
RX Total Frames
RX Total Errors
(0)
(0)
(0)
C – Clear PCS/HDLC Statistics
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-30. SHDSL PCS Statistics Screen
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Statistics>HDLC
TX Total Frames
RX Total Frames
RX Total Errors
(0)
(0)
(0)
C – Clear PCS/HDLC Statistics
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-31. SHDSL HDLC Statistics Screen
Table 5-19. SHDSL PCS/HDLC Statistics Parameters
Parameter
Description
PCS Number
The selected SHDSL PCS (Physical Coding Sublayer) number.
Note: The parameter appears for PCS Statistics only.
Note
TX Total Frames
The total number of frames transmitted.
RX Total Frames
The total number of frames received.
RX Total Errors
The total number of errors received.
PCS Number exists only on 64-65 Octets type of TC-Layer.
Clearing the SHDSL Port Statistics

To clear SHDSL PCS statistics:
•

In the SHDSL PCS Statistics screen (see Figure 5-30), press <C> to clear the
SHDSL PCS statistics.
To clear the SHDSL line statistics:
•
In the SHDSL line Statistics screen (see Figure 5-23), press <C> to clear the
SHDSL line statistics.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Monitoring Performance
5-27
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
5.2
Installation and Operation Manual
Detecting Errors
To detect possible errors, ASMi-54L performs a hardware self-test when turned
on. The self-test sequence checks the critical circuit functions of ASMi-54L.
5.3
Handling Alarms and Traps
ASMi-54L maintains a log file, which can hold up to 1,000 system messages. All
events are time-stamped.
Traps resulting from events that were already reported by a different trap will not
be repeated. For example, LOC traps will not be sent if the physical layer trap,
such as LOS, was sent and the physical layer problem still exists.
The events are layered hierarchically.
The Event Log file contents can be viewed via an ASCII control terminal or a
Network Management Station (NMS).
The contents can be cleared at any time.
Viewing and Masking Alarms and Traps
The trap masking configuration menu is located under Configuration>System>
Management>Managers list. All traps (alarm and system) can be masked per
manager. See Setting Management Access in Chapter 4,
List of Alarm Traps
Refer to Table 5-20 for all the alarm traps that are implemented in ASMi-54L.
Table 5-20. Trap List
Trap
Description
Severity
OID
coldStart
The unit has been restarted and its
configuration may have been altered.
Major
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1
authenticationFailure
User authentication has failed.
Major
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5
linkUp
E1, network, or user Ethernet port has
been connected.
Major
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4
linkDown
E1, network, or user Ethernet port has
been disconnected.
Major
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3
tftpStatusChangeTrap
TFTP session status has changed.
Major
1.3.6.1.4.1.164.6.1.0.1
agnStatusChangeTrap
SNMP agent status has changed.
Major
1.3.6.1.4.1.164.6.1.0.2
hdsl2ShdslSNRMarginCrossing
SNR margin threshold has been
reached/exceeded for the HDSL2/SHDSL
segment endpoint.
Major
1.3.6.1.2.1.10.48.0.2
5-28
Handling Alarms and Traps
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Trap
Description
Severity
OID
hdsl2ShdslLoopAttenCrossing
Loop attenuation threshold has been
reached/exceeded for the HDSL2/SHDSL
segment endpoint.
Major
1.3.6.1.2.1.10.48.0.1
Handling Alarms
ASMi-54L issues the following alarms due to various error conditions:
Table 5-21. Alarm List
Alarm Type
Alarm Number
Alarm Name
Severity
Comments
SHDSL
125
SHDSL LOOP
ATTENUATION ERROR
Minor
Indicates that the loop
attenuation has exceeded the
alarm threshold
124
SHDSL SYNC LOSS
Major
SHDSL line is not synchronized
(“Link Down”)
126
SHDSL SNR MARGIN
ERROR
Minor
Indicates that the SNR margin has
exceeded the alarm threshold
128
LINE RATE NOT COMP TO
TDM RATE
Major
SHDSL rate and E1 rate are not
compatable (E1 rate must be less
than SHDSL rate)
129
SHDSL LOOP
ATTENUATION CUSTOMER
ERROR
Minor
Indicates that the loop
attenuation has exceeded the
alarm threshold on the customer
side of the repeater
130
SHDSL LOOP
ATTENUATION NETWORK
ERROR
Minor
Indicates that the loop
attenuation has exceeded the
alarm threshold of the network
side of the repeater
131
SHDSL SNR MARGIN
CUSTOMER ERROR
Minor
Indicates that the SNR margin has
exceeded the alarm threshold of
the network side of the repeater
132
SPAN IS NOT FULL
Major
Indicates that the span is not
synchronized up to CPE unit,
entered to “Diagnostic mode”,
and synchronized up to the last
repeater
111
E1 SIGNAL LOSS
Major
Loss of receive signal on the E1
link
112
E1 EXCESSIVE BIPOLAR
VIOLATION
Major
The rate of bipolar violations
exceeds 1x10-6 during 1000
seconds
113
E1 AIS OCCURRED
Major
AIS is being detected on the E1
link
E1
PME
Alarms
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Handling Alarms and Traps
5-29
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Alarm Type
Installation and Operation Manual
Alarm Number
Alarm Name
Severity
Comments
114
E1 AIS RED ALARM
Major
AIS and loss of frame alignment
on the E1 link
115
E1 LOC SYNC LOSS
Major
Loss of frame synchronization on
the local E1 link
118
E1 REM SYNC LOSS
Major
Remote loss of frame
synchronization
119
E1 FRAME SLIP
Event
A link frame slip has occurred. This
is usually caused by incorrect
selection of clock sources
120
E1 BPV ERROR HAS
OCCURRED
Event
A bipolar violation error has been
detected on the link
121
E1 EXCESSIVE ERROR
RATIO
Major
The bit error rate of the link
exceeds 10-3
122
E1 CRC ERROR
Event
CRC-4 error that was detected
exceeded the threshold
Ethernet Ports
127
LAN NOT CONNECTED
Major
Ethernet port up/down
System
50
WEB_START
Event
Informative message – indicates
that Web session has started
51
WEB_END
Event
Informative message – indicates
that Web session has ended
70
TFTP_START
Event
Informative message – indicates
that software downloading using
TFTP has started
71
TFTP_END
Event
Informative message – indicates
that software downloading has
been successfully completed
72
TFTP_FAILURE
Event
Informative message – indicates
that software downloading failed
WEB_ACCESS_DENIED
Event
Informative message – indicates
that Web access is denied
91
Displaying the Event Log File
ASMi-54L has an integrated SNTP client. The SNTP client is used as a means for
receiving the date and time from the network. When the SNTP server is properly
configured and accessible, the device displays the actual date and time as was
received from the SNTP server, instead of the system uptime, which is the default
state.
When the actual date and time are not available, the log file messages are
recorded with the date 00-00-0000 and system uptime. Once the SNTP server
becomes available, all messages (including those already received) appear with
the actual date and time.
5-30
Handling Alarms and Traps
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
To access the Event Log file:
1. Select Main Menu>Monitoring>System>Event Log.
The Event Log screen appears (see Figure 5-32 and Figure 5-33).
Table 5-22 presents the list of Ethernet event types that appear in the
Event Log file.
2. Use the arrow keys to scroll the event list up and down, left and right.
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>System>Event Log
Source
SHDSL Port 2
SHDSL Port 1
Eth Port 4
Eth Port 3
Eth Port 2
Eth Port 1
Current Time: 0:22:46
Description
SHDSL SYNC LOSS
SHDSL SYNC LOSS
LAN NOT CONNECTED
LAN NOT CONNECTED
LAN NOT CONNECTED
LAN NOT CONNECTED
Status
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
Date
1970-01-01
1970-01-01
1970-01-01
1970-01-01
1970-01-01
1970-01-01
Time
00:00:01
00:00:02
00:00:04
00:00:04
00:00:04
00:00:04
>
c-Clear Table; r-Refresh Table
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-32. Typical Log File Before SNTP Server is Accessible
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>System>Event Log
Source
SHDSL Port 1
Eth Port 2
Eth Port 4
Description
SHDSL SYNC LOSS
LINK DOWN
LINK DOWN
>
c-Clear Table; r-Refresh Table
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit;
Status
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
Date
2008-04-07
2008-02-06
2008-01-10
Time
00:00:01
12:00:02
12:00:04
?-help
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-33. Typical Log File While SNTP Server is Accessible
Table 5-22. Ethernet Event List
Event
Severity
Description
Link up
Major
Port is up.
Link down
Major
Port is down.
TFTP failure
Event
Failed in processing software download.
SNMP Authentication failure
Event
Wrong community.
TFTP start
Event
TFTP began.
TFTP finish
Event
TFTP ended.
WEB Manager list restriction
Event
WEB session from an unauthorized IP address.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Handling Alarms and Traps
5-31
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Installation and Operation Manual
Refreshing the Event Log File

To refresh the Event Log file:
•
Select Monitoring>System>Event Log and press <R> (Refresh).
Clearing the Event Log File

To clear the Event Log file:
1. Select Monitoring>System>Event Log and press <C> (Clear).
The following screen appears:
Are you sure (Y/N)?
2. Press <Y> to clear or <N> to return to the Event Log screen.
5.4
Troubleshooting
Checking Sanity
While configuring E1 or SHDSL line rates, E1 framed mode, and E1 TS0, ASMi-54L
checks to see whether the configured E1 rate is less than the configured SHDSL
line rate. When sanity rules are violated during configuration, an error message is
displayed. If the sanity rules are violated during operation, an alarm is issued.
A sanity check is based on the following calculation:
{[(E1 Rate /64)/ Number of wire pairs] rounded up} x 64 + (64 x Number of
wire pairs), must be less than the Configured Line Rate or Actual Line Rate
where:
E1 rate = the sum of timeslots, including TS0, in transparent mode
Number of wire pairs = 1 or 2
Configured Line Rate = the configured rate of one pair when Line Probe is
“Disable”
Actual Line Rate = the operating rate of one pair when Line Probe is “Enable”
and SHDSL is in “Sync” state.
•
If the configured E1 rate does not conform to the above rule,
the error “TDM rate is greater than the SHDSL rate” appears.
•
If the configured SHDSL rate does not conform to the above rule,
the error “SHDSL rate illegal value” appears.
•
If during operation, the E1 rate is greater than the SHDSL rate,
the alarm “Line rate is not compatible with TDM rate” is set.
Note that in HDLC:
5-32
•
The line rate configuration must be a multiple of (64K x number of wire
pairs).
•
The minimum line rate configuration is (192K x number of wire pairs).
Troubleshooting
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Troubleshooting Chart
Follow the procedures in Table 5-23 to identify and remedy problems in unit
operation.
Table 5-23. Troubleshooting Chart
Fault
Probable Cause
Remedial Action
Power LED off
No power supplied to unit
•
Check power source.
•
Verify power cable is connected and
correctly wired.
Ethernet Link LED off
No traffic flow
between two units
•
No Ethernet link detected
•
•
Ethernet port of user and
ASMi-54L are not in the same
rate or duplex mode
Verify cable is connected and correctly
wired.
•
Check user’s and ASMi-54L Ethernet port
configuration (negotiation, rate, duplex
mode).
•
Use Event Log File to check events.
•
Use System Interface Status screen for
assistance. All active ports that show
Activation–Up should show Operation–
Up.
•
Use Event Log File to check events.
•
Check ASMi-54L configuration and, if
necessary, other ASMi-54L parameters.
•
Check timing settings.
Configuration or logical layer
problems
Partial Traffic Flow
Timing configuration is not
properly set
5.5
Testing the Unit
ASMi-54L checks network integrity by running local and remote loopback tests
(supported for E1 interface and repeaters only).
E1 Port Diagnostics
To diagnose E1 line problems, ASMi-54L supports the local and remote loopbacks
initiated from the supervisory terminal. All loopbacks start in the immediate
vicinity of the link and then proceed to the inner part of the unit.
When working with EOC, full control is given to run loops in all directions, on
remote devices from the local and vice versa.

To diagnose the E1 line problems with loopbacks:
•
Select Diagnostics>E1.
The E1 Diagnostics screen appears. See Table 5-24 to set the parameters.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Testing the Unit
5-33
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Diagnostics>E1
Port
Unit
(1)
(Far End)
1. Loop
2. Time out (min)[0 – 3600]
>
(Disable)
(0)
>
r-Refresh
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-34. E1 Diagnostics Screen – Far End (CO)
ASMi-54L
Diagnostics>E1
Port
Unit
(1)
(Near End)
1. Loop
2. Time out (min)[0 – 3600]
>
(Disable)
(0)
>
r-Refresh
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-35. E1 Diagnostics Screen – Near End (CO)
ASMi-54L
Diagnostics>E1
Port
Unit
(1)
(Far End )
1. Loop
2. Time out (min)[0 – 3600]
>
(Disable)
(0)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-36. E1 Diagnostics Screen – Far End (CPE)
5-34
Testing the Unit
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
ASMi-54L
Diagnostics>E1
Port
Unit
(1)
(Near End )
1. Loop
2. Time out (min)[0 – 3600]
>
(Disable)
(0)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-37. E1 Diagnostics Screen – Near End (CPE)
Table 5-24. E1 Diagnostic Parameters
Parameter
Values
Comments
Port
1
The number of the E1 port under test.
Loop
Disable
Local
Remote
No loop
LLB - a loop towards the E1 link
RLB - a loop towards the SHDSL link
Time out (min)
0
1 – 3600
Endless loop
Loop time in seconds
Running Local Loopback Tests
The local loopback test (LLB) checks the performance and data connectivity of
the local ASMi-54L E1 link and the connection between ASMi-54L and local E1
User equipment (see Figure 5-38).
Note
After the loop timeout, the screen cannot be refreshed automatically.
ASMi-54L
ETH
SHDSL
E1
Local
ASMi-54L
LAN
LAN
PBX
PBX
Figure 5-38. Local Loopback

To activate a local loopback:
1. Select Main Menu>Diagnostics>E1.
The E1 Diagnostics screen appears (see Figure 5-34).
2. From the E1 Diagnostics screen, select Time out to set the loopback timeout
(in minutes).
The Timeout value changes.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Testing the Unit
5-35
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Note
Installation and Operation Manual
Loop timeout = 0 sets endless test.
3. Select Loop.
The Loop screen appears (see Figure 5-39).
4. From the Loop Tests menu, select Local.
5. Press <S> (Save) to activate the LLB.
The LLB is initiated.
ASMi-54L
Diagnostics>E1>Loop
1. Disable
2. Local
3. Remote
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-39. Loop Screen
Running Remote Loopback Tests
The remote loopback test (RLB) checks the performance and data connectivity of
the local and remote ASMi-54L SHDSL link (see Figure 5-38).
Note
After the loop timeout, the screen cannot be refreshed automatically.
ASMi-54L
ETH
SHDSL
ETH
Remote
E1
ASMi-54L
E1
(E1 Data Only)
LAN
LAN
PBX
PBX
Figure 5-40. Remote Loopback

To activate a remote loopback:
1. Select Main Menu>Diagnostics>E1.
The E1 Diagnostics screen appears (see Figure 5-34).
2. From the E1 Diagnostics screen, select Time out to set the loopback timeout
(in minutes).
The Timeout value changes.
Note
Loop timeout = 0 sets endless test.
3. From the E1 Diagnostics screen, select Loop.
The Loop screen appears (see Figure 5-39).
4. From the Loop Tests menu, select Remote.
5-36
Testing the Unit
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Note
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
The Remote submenu appears only when the line is synchronized.
5. Press <S> (Save) to activate the RLB.
The RLB is initiated.
Deactivating E1 Loopbacks

To deactivate a running loopback:
1. Select Diagnostics>E1>Loop.
The Loop screen appears (see Figure 5-39).
2. From the Loop Tests menu, select Disable.
3. Press <S> (Save).
The loopback test is deactivated.
Repeater Diagnostics
To diagnose repeater problems, ASMi-54L supports the local and remote
loopbacks initiated from the supervisory terminal. All loopbacks start in the
immediate vicinity of the link and then proceed to the inner part of the unit.

To diagnose the repeater problems with loopbacks:
•
Select Diagnostics>Repeaters.
The Repeater Diagnostics screen appears. See Table 5-25 to set the
parameters.
ASMi-54L
Diagnostics>Repeaters
Repeater
(1)
1. Network loop
2. Time out (min)[0 – 3600]
> (Disable)
(0)
>
‘r’ - Refresh
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 5-41. Repeater Diagnostics Screen
Table 5-25. Repeater Diagnostic ParametersTable 5
Parameter
Values
Comments
Repeater
1-8
The number of the repeater under test.
Default: 1
Note: The parameter appears when at least one repeater
is present in span.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Testing the Unit
5-37
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Values
Comments
Network loop
Disable
Enable
Sets a network loopback on the chosen repeater as
follows:
Disable – no loop
Enable – a loop towards the local device
Default: Disable
Time out (min)
0
1 – 3600
Endless loop
Loop time in seconds
Default: 0
Running Local Loopback Tests
The local loopback test checks the performance and data connectivity of the
selected local ASMi-54L repeater and the connection between ASMi-54L and local
network user equipment (see Figure 5-42).
ASMi-54L
ETH
SHDSL
Local
Repeater
ASMi-54L
LAN
LAN
PBX
PBX
Figure 5-42. Local Network Loopback

To activate a local loopback:
1. Select Diagnostics>Repeaters.
The Repeater Diagnostics screen appears (see Figure 5-41).
2. From the Repeater Diagnostics screen, select Time out to set the loopback
timeout (in seconds).
The Timeout value is changed.
Note
Loop timeout = 0 sets a perpetual test.
3. Select Network Loop and change Disable to Enable.
4. Press <S> (Save) to activate the local loopback.
The network loopback is initiated.
Note
After the loop timeout, the screen cannot be refreshed automatically. To refresh
the screen, press <R> (Refresh).
Running Remote Loopback Tests
The remote loopback test checks the performance and data connectivity of the
repeater and remote ASMi-54L (see Figure 5-43).
5-38
Testing the Unit
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
ASMi-54L
ETH
SHDSL
ETH
Remote
E1
ASMi-54L
E1
(Repeater
Data Only)
LAN
LAN
PBX
PBX
Figure 5-43. Remote Network Loopback

To activate a remote loopback:
1. Select Diagnostics>Repeaters.
The Repeaters Diagnostics screen appears (see Figure 5-41).
2. From the Repeater Diagnostics screen, select Time out to set the loopback
timeout (in minutes).
The Timeout value is changed.
Note
Loop timeout = 0 sets a perpetual test.
3. From the Repeater Diagnostics screen, select Network Loop.
4. From the Loop Tests menu, select Remote.
Note
The Remote submenu appears only when the line is synchronized.
5. Press <S> (Save) to activate the RLB.
The RLB is initiated.
Note
After finishing loop timeout, the screen cannot be refreshed automatically. To
refresh the screen, press <R> (Refresh).
Deactivating Repeater Loopbacks

To deactivate a running loopback:
1. Select Diagnostics>Repeaters>Network Loop.
The Network Loop screen appears (see Figure 5-39).
2. From the Loop Tests menu, select Disable.
3. Press <S> (Save).
The loopback test is deactivated.
5.6
Frequently Asked Questions
Q
Does ASMi-54L comply with UL-1950 and K.21 safety standards?
A
UL-1950 is an obsolete standard. The new one is UL-60950-1.
ASMi-54L does not have the UL1950 certificate. Nevertheless, ASMi-54L
complies with UL1950, meaning that ASMi-54L will pass the UL1950
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Frequently Asked Questions
5-39
Chapter 5 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Installation and Operation Manual
certification process if needed. The certification process takes around
6 months and the cost is quite significant. If you have a specific project which
requires UL1950 certification, please contact RAD to evaluate it. ASMi-54L's
line protection is in compliance with the requirements of UL1950. This only
means that the ASMi-54L has line fuses in the lines.
ASMi-54L complies with K.21 and has the certification as well.
Q
Does ASMi-54L support OAM Ethernet?
A
It will transparently transport OAM messages, but it does not handle them.
Q
Does ASMi-54L need an IP address to be managed?
A
To manage it via SNMP or Telnet, via SNMP or Telnet, it needs an IP address.
For terminal access, there is no need to define a management IP address.
5.7
Technical Support
Technical support for this product can be obtained from the local partner from
whom it was purchased.
RADcare Global Professional Services offers a wide variety of service, support and
training options, including expert consulting and troubleshooting assistance,
online tools, regular training programs, and various equipment coverage options.
For further information, please contact the RAD partner nearest you or one of
RAD's offices worldwide.
RAD Data Communications would like your help in improving its product
documentation. Please send us an e-mail with your comments.
Thank you for your assistance!
5-40
Technical Support
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Chapter 6
Software Upgrade
This chapter explains how to upgrade ASMi-54L when a newer software version is
available.
The information includes the following:
•
Detailed conditions required for the upgrade
•
Any impact the upgrade may have on the system
•
Overview of downloading options
•
Upgrade via the File Utilities menu
•
Upgrade via the VXWORKS Boot Manager functionality.
6.1
Compatibility
Software upgrade is required to fix product limitations, enable new features, and
make the unit compatible with other devices that are already running the new
software version.
6.2
Impact
ASMi-54L resets automatically after the software upgrade, resulting in up to
two minutes of downtime.
Software upgrade does not affect any user settings.
6.3
Prerequisites
This section details the ASMi-54L software and outlines system requirements
needed for the upgrade procedure.
Software Files
Software releases are distributed as *.img files. The files can be obtained from
the local RAD business partner from whom the device was purchased.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Prerequisites
6-1
Chapter 6 Software Upgrade
Installation and Operation Manual
System Requirements
Before starting the upgrade, verify that you have the following:
•
•
For upgrade via TFTP:

Operational ASMi-54L unit with valid IP parameters configured for the
host

Connection to a PC with a TFTP server application (such as 3Cdaemon or
PumpKIN), and a valid IP address

Software file (*.img ) stored on the PC.
For upgrade via XMODEM:

Operational ASMi-54L unit

Connection to a PC with a terminal emulation application (such as
HyperTerminal)

Software file (*.img) stored on the PC.
6.4
Software Upgrade Options
Application software can be downloaded to ASMi-54L via the S/W & File Transfer
option using TFTP submenu (Utilities>File Transfer), using the TFTP, or via the
Boot menu, using XMODEM or TFTP.
6.5
Upgrading ASMi-54L Software via the File
Utilities Menu
The recommended method for downloading software is TFTP, using the File
Transfer>TFTP menu from the File Utilities menu.
Network administrators can use this procedure to distribute new software
releases from a central location to all the managed ASMi-54L units in the
network.
Figure 6-1. Downloading a Software Application File to ASMi-54L via TFTP
6-2
Upgrading ASMi-54L Software via the File Utilities Menu
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual

Chapter 6 Software Upgrade
To download software files to ASMi-54L via the File Utilities menu:
1. Verify that the *.img file is stored on the same PC as the TFTP server
application.
2. Verify that the ASMi-54L host has valid IP parameters.
3. Ping from the PC to verify the connection.
4. Activate the TFTP server application.
5. Download the *.img file from the PC to ASMi-54L.
Note
Configuration values shown in this chapter are examples only.
Verifying the ASMi-54L Host Parameters
The ASMi-54L host must have host IP parameters configured according to your
network requirements. Otherwise you will not be able to establish a proper
communication session with the TFTP server. Refer to the following sections in
this manual for additional information:

•
Connecting to ASCII Terminal in Chapter 2
•
Working with Terminal in Chapter 3
•
Configuring IP Host Parameters in Chapter 4.
To verify the ASMi-54L host parameters:
•
Display the Host IP menu (Main Menu>Configuration>System>Management>
Host), and verify that the host IP address, IP mask, and default gateway are
configured according to your network requirements.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Management>Host
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
IP Address
Mask
Default gateway
Read community
Write community
Trap community
DHCP
Encapsulation
… (172.17.143.140)
… (255.255.255.0)
… (172.17.143.1)
… (public)
… ()
… ()
>
>
>
ESC-Previous menu;!-Main menu; &-Exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 6-2. Configuring the Host
Activating the TFTP Server
Once the TFTP server is activated on the PC, it waits for any TFTP file transfer
request originating from the product, and carries out the received request
automatically. Transferring Software and Configuration Files section in Chapter 4
explains how to prepare your PC for the TFTP file transfer.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Upgrading ASMi-54L Software via the File Utilities Menu
6-3
Chapter 6 Software Upgrade

Installation and Operation Manual
To run the TFTP server:
•
Activate a TFTP server application, such as 3Cdaemon (available from
www.3com.com) or PumpKIN (available from http://kin.klever.net/pumpkin/).
Downloading the New Software Release File to ASMi-54L
This procedure is used to replace the current software version with the new
software release (*.img file).

To download the new software release file:
1. From the S/W & File Transfer using TFTP menu (Main Menu>Utilities>File
Transfer>TFTP), enter the following:

File name – *.img

Command – Software Download

Server IP Address – IP address of the PC.
2. Save the changes to initiate the download.
The software download begins. When the process is completed, new
software release (*.img file) replaces the current software version and
becomes active.
ASMi-54L
Utilities>File Transfer>TFTP
1.
2.
3.
4.
Transfer Status
Transfer Error
Command
Remote File Name
Server IP
TFTP Total Timeout (ms)[60-240]
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
(no0p)
(NoError)
>
…
…
…
(Put your string here)
(0.0.0.0)
(60)
1M/ 1C
Figure 6-3. Transferring New Software Release Using TFTP
6.6
Upgrading ASMi-54L Software via VXWORKS
Boot Manager
Software can also be downloaded using VXWORKS Boot Manager. The VXWORKS
Boot Manager functions can be accessed while ASMi-54L performs initialization
(for example, after power-up).
You may need to start the loading from the Boot Manager when it is not possible
to activate TFTP from the S/W & File Transfer using the TFTP menu (for example,
if the ASMi-54L software has not yet been downloaded or is corrupted).
6-4
Upgrading ASMi-54L Software via VXWORKS Boot Manager
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 6 Software Upgrade
Caution The VXWORKS Boot Manager procedures are recommended for use by authorized
personnel only because this menu has many additional options that are intended
for use by technical support personnel only.
Two software downloading options are available from the VXWORKS Boot
Manager menu:
•
Downloading using the XMODEM protocol. This is usually performed by
downloading from a PC directly connected to the CONTROL DCE port of the
unit.
Figure 6-4. Downloading a Software Application File to ASMi-54L via XMODEM
•
Downloading using the TFTP/FTP protocol. This is usually performed by
downloading from a remote location that provides an IP communication path
to an Ethernet port of ASMi-54L.
Starting VXWORKS Boot Manager
Caution Prior to initiating the VXWORKS Boot Manager functionality, connect the ASCII
terminal or PC with terminal emulation to the Control (serial) port of ASMi-54L.

To start VXWORKS Boot Manager:
1. Switch off ASMi-54L.
2. Open the ASCII terminal.
3. Turn on ASMi-54L.
Information about the System Boot, Boot version, and information about
CPU, OS-version, BSP version and Boot Manager version is displayed.
The following message appears:
Use '?'/help to view available commands.
Press any key to stop auto-boot....
4. Press any key to stop the auto-boot and get a boot prompt.
The boot prompt is displayed:
[boot]:
5. Press <?> to display the Help list.
The Help list is displayed (see Figure 6-5).
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Upgrading ASMi-54L Software via VXWORKS Boot Manager
6-5
Chapter 6 Software Upgrade
Installation and Operation Manual
[boot]:
[boot]: ?
Commands:
?/help
@
p
c [param]
v
dl [file-name|x]
s
dir
format [all|prm]
control-x/reset
-
print this list
boot (load and go)
print boot parameters
change boot parameter(s)
print boot logo with versions information
download application image (x – by Xmodem)
switch active & backup application images
shows available application images
erases data on the boot flash device
[all|prm – including|only the boot-parameters-line]
- reboot/reset
[boot]:
Figure 6-5. VXWORKS Boot Manager Help List
6. Press <P> to display all boot parameters.
The boot parameters list appears. A typical boot parameters list is shown
in Figure 6-6. The parameters are described in Table 6-1.
[boot]: p
server name
file name
device IP
device mask
server IP
gateway IP
user
ftp password
device name
quick autoboot
protocol
baud rate
(sn)
(fn)
(ip)
(dm)
(sip)
(g)
(u)
(pw)
(dn)
[q]
(p)
(b)
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
server
vxWorks
192.168.1.2
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
192.168.1.1
sph
vx
ASMi-54L
y
ftp
115200
Figure 6-6. Typical Boot Parameters Screen
Table 6-1. Typical Boot Parameters
6-6
Parameter
Command
Description
server name
sn
The TFTP server name
file name
fn
The application image file (*.img) name
device ip
ip
The IP address of ASMi-54L
device mask
dm
The IP subnet mask of ASMi-54L
server IP
sip
The TFTP server IP address
Upgrading ASMi-54L Software via VXWORKS Boot Manager
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 6 Software Upgrade
Parameter
Command
Description
gateway ip
g
The TFTP server default gateway IP-address
if the server is located on a different LAN.
Note: Be sure to select an IP address within
the subnet of the assigned ASMi-54L IP
address.
Note: If no default gateway is needed, for
example, because the TFTP server is
attached to the same LAN as ASMi-54L
being loaded, enter 0.0.0.0.
user
u
The user name, as registered at the FTP
server.
Note: Displayed only when using FTP
Protocol.
ftp password
vx
The user password, as registered at the FTP
server.
Note: Displayed only when using FTP
Protocol.
device name
dn
ASMi-54L
quick autoboot
q
Enabling or disabling the quick autoboot
feature
protocol
p
The file transfer protocol in use: TFTP,
XMODEM, or FTP
baud rate
b
Transmission bit rate (in kbps): 9.6, 19.2,
115.2
Note
The CLI commands are case insensitive. Use either uppercase letters or lowercase
letters.
7. Press <C> to change the boot parameters and type valid values in each field.
8. Perform one of the following:
a. Press <Ctrl + X> to perform a cold (hard) reboot with turning power off
and then on, and repeat steps 4 and 6 to check that all the defined boot
parameters are saved and still valid.
b. Enter <Reset> to perform a warm (soft) reboot without turning off.
The following message is displayed:
Are you sure (y/n)?
Press <Y>. The following message is displayed:
Instantiating /ram as rawFs, device = 0x1
Formatting /ram for DOSFS
Instantiating /ram as rawFs, device = 0x1
Formatting...OK.
The [boot]: prompt is displayed immediately.
All the Boot parameters are saved and still valid.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Upgrading ASMi-54L Software via VXWORKS Boot Manager
6-7
Chapter 6 Software Upgrade
Note

Installation and Operation Manual
The new parameters take effect only after the resetting is completed.
To decompress empty flash memory:
1. Perform <dir> to show the list of available *.img files and then perform
<format> to erase the flash.
No valid images appear available.
2. Press <@> to exit Boot.
3. Press <Ctrl + X> to perform reboot.
4. Power up the unit.
Note
When the flash memory is empty, decompressing is impossible.
Using the TFTP/FTP Protocol

To download software file(s) from the Boot menu to ASMi-54L via TFTP/FTP:
1. Verify that the *.img file is stored on the PC with the TFTP server application.
2. Activate the TFTP server application / FTP server.
Note
When working with FTP server, the user name and password in Boot parameters
must be the same as defined in FTP server.
3. Turn on ASMi-54L and enter the Boot menu. Set TFTP or FTP protocol.
4. From the Boot menu, press <dl filename> to start downloading the *.img
from the PC to ASMi-54L.
The image defined in Boot parameters is downloaded.
5. Perform <dir> to display the available application images.
Only one application image is displayed; its status is Active. The status of
the Backup image is Empty.
6. If needed, define a new image in the Boot parameters list and start a new
downloading process, as described in step 3.
The new image defined in Boot parameters is downloaded.
Note
The maximum size of the application image is 3 MB.
7. Perform <dir> to verify status of the new image.
The last downloaded image appears with Active status. Typically, the
following information is displayed:
6-8
Upgrading ASMi-54L Software via VXWORKS Boot Manager
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 6 Software Upgrade
Active image: 0 (Application 0)
Backup image: 1 (Application 1)
;<image-x.img>
;<image-y.img>
OR:
Active image: 1 (Application 1)
Backup image: 0 (Application 0)
;<image-x.img>
;<image-y.img>
The <dir> command shows information for all images according to their
headers (size, name, date, version and status)
Note
If downloading failed, repeat the entire procedure.
8. To switch between the Active and the Backup application images if needed,
press <S> and then perform <dir> to show the list of images.
The Active and Backup application images switch their status.
9. When the downloading process is successfully completed, press <@> to exit
the Boot Manager.
When the ASMi-54L initialization ends, the unit loads the new software.
Using the XMODEM Protocol

To download software files to ASMi-54L via XMODEM:
1. Verify that the *.img is stored on the PC with the terminal application.
2. Activate the terminal application. Configure the communication parameters of
the selected PC serial port for asynchronous communication for 115.2 kbps,
no parity, one start bit, eight data bits, and one stop bit. Turn off all types of
flow control.
3. Turn on ASMi-54L, set the same baud rate, and select XMODEM protocol in
the ASMi-54L Boot menu.
4. Start the transfer in accordance with the program you are using. For example,
if you are using the Windows HyperTerminal utility:
a. From the Boot menu, press <dl x>.
b. Select Transfer>Send File from the HyperTerminal application menu.
The Send File window is displayed.
c.
Select the prescribed ASMi-54L software file name (you may use the
Browse function to find it).
d. In the Protocol field, select Xmodem.
e. When ready, press <Send> in the Send File window. You can now monitor
the progress of the downloading in the Send File window.
The image defined in Boot parameters is downloaded to ASMi-54L.
5. Perform <dir> to display the available application images.
Only one application image is displayed; its status is Active. The status of
the Backup image is Empty.
6. If needed, define a new image in the Boot parameters list and start a new
downloading process, as described in step 4.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Upgrading ASMi-54L Software via VXWORKS Boot Manager
6-9
Chapter 6 Software Upgrade
Installation and Operation Manual
The new image defined in Boot parameters is downloaded.
Note
The maximum size of the application image is 3 MB.
7. Perform <dir> to verify status of the new image.
The last downloaded image appears with Active status. The previously
downloaded image appears as a Backup image.
Note
If downloading fails, repeat the entire procedure.
8. To switch between the Active and the Backup application images if needed,
press <S> and then perform <dir> to show the list of images.
The Active and Backup application images switch their status.
9. When the downloading process is successfully completed, press <@> to exit
the Boot Manager.
When the ASMi-54L initialization ends, the unit loads the new software.
6-10
Upgrading ASMi-54L Software via VXWORKS Boot Manager
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Chapter 7
Application Tutorial
Note
This tutorial provides an example of step-by-step installation and configuration
for a typical application. For optimal operation of your own applications, RAD
strongly recommends that you enroll in one of its RADcare training programs,
which will help you gain configuration and troubleshooting skills, as well as
expertise in handling your network. For further information, please contact the
RAD Partner nearest you or one of RAD's Offices worldwide.
This chapter describes how to build a typical application in which an ASMi-54L
unit is used for Customer Premises with inband management and an Aware
Bridge.
Figure 7-1 illustrates a typical point-to-point application that includes Ethernet
services. In actual applications, the ASMi-54L network interfaces are connected to
the PSN equipment (e.g. switches). The user interfaces are connected to the user
equipment (e.g. routers).
Remote
ASMi-54L
Local
ASMi-54L
Router
PBX
Remote PC
Local PC
Figure 7-1. Typical Point-to Point Application
In this section you will learn how to:
•
Connect ASMi-54L to the network equipment
•
Access ASMi-54L and prepare it for network management
•
Enable fault propagation
•
Run diagnostic loopbacks
•
Collect performance statistics.
7.1
Equipment List
The following devices are used in the application:
•
Two ASMi-54L units with a typical panel including an E1 port
•
Two PCs
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Equipment List
7-1
Chapter 7 Application Tutorial
Installation and Operation Manual
•
Two straight Ethernet copper cables with RJ-45 connectors
•
Two straight E1 cables with RJ-45 connectors
•
Two supervisory terminal copper RS-232/V.24 cables with DB-9 male
connectors
•
One straight SHDSL cable with RJ-45 connectors.
7.2
Installing ASMi-54Ls
Before starting configuration, install the units as follows:
1. Connect the LAN Port of the local PC to the ETH port of the local ASMi-54L
device using a straight Ethernet cable with RJ-45 connector.
Ethernet Copper Cable
with RJ-45 Connectors
LAN Port on a PC
Figure 7-2. Connecting ASMi-54L ETH Port to a PC
2. Connect the LAN Port of the remote PC to the ETH port of the remote
ASMi-54L device using a straight Ethernet cable with RJ-45 connector.
3. Connect the E1 provider (for example, PBX) to the E1 port of the local
ASMi-54L device using a straight E1 cable with RJ-45 connector.
Note
7-2
Unbalanced E1 interface is provided via CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1 adaptor cable.
Installing ASMi-54Ls
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 7 Application Tutorial
E1 Cable
with RJ-45 Connectors
RJ-45 E1 Port
Figure 7-3. Connecting ASMi-54L E1 Port to E1 Provider
4. Connect the E1 provider (for example, router) to the E1 port of the remote
ASMi-54L device using a straight E1 cable with RJ-45 connector, as shown in
Figure 7-3.
5. Connect a local PC (supervisory terminal) to the CONTROL port of the local
ASMi-54L device using a straight copper RS-232/V.24 cable with DB-9 male
connector.
Copper Cable
with DB-9 Connectors
RS-232 Port on a PC
Figure 7-4. Connecting ASMi-54L CONTROL Port to a PC
6. Connect a remote PC (supervisory terminal) to the CONTROL port of the
remote ASMi-54L device using a straight copper RS-232/V.24 cable with DB-9
male connector, as shown in Figure 7-4.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Installing ASMi-54Ls
7-3
Chapter 7 Application Tutorial
Installation and Operation Manual
7. Connect the SHDSL port of the local ASMi-54L to the SHDSL port of the
remote ASMi-54L using a straight SHDSL cable with RJ-45 connector.
SHDSL Cable
with RJ-45 Connectors
Figure 7-5. Connecting Local ASMi-54L SHDSL Port to
Remote ASMi-54L SHDSL Port
8. Power up the ASMi-54L units. Verify that the PS LEDs in the front panels are
lit.
9. Verify correct ASMi-54L startup by the state of the PS LED(s), as follows:

On (Green) – power supply is on

Off – power supply is off.
7.3
Configuring the Local ASMi-54L
Configuring for Management
This section explains how to configure the local ASMi-54L unit.
Refer to Chapter 3 for an explanation of how to select management options and
save the changes.
Accessing ASMi-54L
Initial configuration of the management parameters is usually performed via an
ASCII terminal or a network management station (NMS). Once the ASMi-54L host
IP parameters are set, it can be accessed via Telnet, or a Web-based application,
or RADview (a network management station – NMS) for operation configuration.

To access ASMi-54L:
1. Connect your PC to the ASMi-54L CONTROL.
2. Set the following parameters for your terminal emulator:
7-4
Configuring the Local ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual

Baud rate – 115200

Data bits – 8

Stop bits – 1

Parity –None

Flow control – None
Chapter 7 Application Tutorial
3. Set the terminal emulator to VT100 emulation for optimal view of system
menus. If you are using HyperTerminal, set the terminal mode to 132-column
mode for optimal view of system menus (Properties>Settings>Terminal
Setup>132 column mode).

To enter as a superuser:
1. Enter su for user name.
2. Enter 1234 for password.
The Main menu appears.
Configuring the Host IP
To manage the device remotely (via Telnet or Web), you must configure the host IP.

To configure ASMi-54L host IP:
1. From Main menu, select Configuration>System>Management>Host.
The Host screen appears.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Management>Host
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
IP Address
Mask
Default gateway
Read community
Write community
Trap community
DHCP
Encapsulation
…
…
…
…
…
…
>
>
(0.0.0.0)
(255.255.255.0)
(0.0.0.0)
(public)
(private)
(public)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 7-6. Host Screen
2. Enter the following parameters (for example):

DHCP – Disable.

ASMi-54L IP address – 172.17.143.140

Host IP mask – 255.255.255.0

Host default gateway IP address – 172.17.143.1
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring the Local ASMi-54L
7-5
Chapter 7 Application Tutorial
Installation and Operation Manual

Read Community – Public

Write Community – Private

Trap Community – Public
3. Press <ESC> to return to the Management menu.
4. Press <S> to save the parameters.
The changes are saved in the unit.
Configuring the Network Managers
The network management stations to which the SNMP agent sends traps can be
defined or modified. Up to ten managers can be defined. Entering the IP address
and corresponding subnet mask defines each management station. In addition,
you can temporarily prevent a manager station from receiving traps by masking
the network manager.

To configure the manager list:
1. Select Main Menu>Configuration>System>Management>Managers List.
The Management List screen appears.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Management>Managers List
Manager ID
1.
| 2.
v 3.
4.
5.
Manager IP
1.1.1.1
2.2.2.2
3.3.3.3
4.4.4.4
5.5.5.5
1. Change cell
Manager Trap Mask
Unmask
Unmask
Mask
Unmask
Unmask
… (1.1.1.1)
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
1M/ 1C
Figure 7-7. Manager List Screen
2. Move the cursor to the Manager IP cell you wish to modify by pressing the Up
and Down arrow keys and press <1>.
3. Enter a new IP address for the selected network manager.
4. Move the cursor to the Manager Trap Mask field and press <1> to toggle
between Mask and Unmask to mask or unmask traps for the selected
management station.
The default is Unmask.
After the manager list is edited, the changes are saved automatically.
7-6
Configuring the Local ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 7 Application Tutorial
Setting Management Access

To set Telnet, SNMP, or WEB access permissions for a user:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Configuration>System>Management>Management
Access.
The Management Access screen appears.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Management>Management Access
1. User Access
2. Telnet Access
3. SNMP Access
4. WEB Access
5. Access Control
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
(Enable)
(Enable)
(Enable)
1M/ 1C
Figure 7-8. Management Access Screen
2. Select the access level you want to change: Telnet Access, SNMP Access, or
Web Access.
3. Select the permission setting for this access level: Enable.
4. Leave the Access Control in a default status (ACL is not active).
5. Press <S> to save the changes.
The changes are saved in the unit.
Configuring Terminal Parameters
The terminal is connected to the control port. The management software allows
you to configure the terminal baud rate.
Note
The Baud Rate parameter is masked during a Telnet session.

To change the terminal baud rate:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Configuration>System>Terminal.
The Terminal screen appears.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Terminal
1. Baud rate
> (115200 bps)
>
Please select item from 1 to 1
S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 7-9. Terminal Screen
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring the Local ASMi-54L
7-7
Chapter 7 Application Tutorial
Installation and Operation Manual
2. Select Baud Rate.
The Baud Rate screen appears.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Terminal>Baud rate (19200 bps)
1. 9600 bps
2. 19200 bps
3. 115200 bps
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 7-10. Baud Rate Screen
3. Select the desired baud rate: 19200 bps.
4. Return to the Terminal screen and press <S> to save the changes.
The changes are saved in the unit.
Setting Date and Time

To configure the date and time parameters:
1. Select Main Menu>Configuration>System>Date and Time.
The Date and Time screen appears.
2. In the Date and Time screen, set the Broadcast Mode, Poll Interval, UTC
Offset and NTP Servers parameters, and press <S> to save the changes.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Date and Time
1.
2.
3.
4.
System Date
... (1970-01-01)
System Time
... (19:27:25)
Broadcast Mode
(Disable)
Poll Interval (minutes)[1 - 1440] ... (15)
UTC Offset [-12 - +13]
>
(00.00)
NTP Servers
[]>
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 7-11. Date and Time Screen
Configuring for Operation
ASMi-54L has four Ethernet interfaces, one or two SHDSL interfaces, and one E1
interface (optional). The Ethernet, E1, and SHDSL configuration menus are
accessed from the Physical Layer menu.
Configuring the Ethernet Port

To configure the Ethernet port:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Configuration>Physical Layer>Ethernet.
7-8
Configuring the Local ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 7 Application Tutorial
The Ethernet Port Configuration screen appears. Set the parameters as
prompted in the screen.
2. Press <S> to save the changes.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>Ethernet
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Port
(1)
Administrative Status
(Up)
Auto Negotiation
(Enable)
Flow Control
(Disable)
Max Capability Advertised
> (100base–TX Full Duplex)
Ingress Rate Limit (Kbps)[64-100000]
…
(100000)
Rate Limit Packet Types
> (All)
MDIX Auto Cross Over
(Enable)
Alarms
(Unmasked)
>
F-Forward; B-Backward
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 7-12. Ethernet Port Configuration Screen
Configuring the E1 Port

To configure the E1 port:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Configuration>Physical Layer>E1 Port.
The E1 configuration screen appears. Set the parameters as prompted in
the screen.
2. Press <S> to save the changes.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>E1
E1 port
(1)
1. Administrative Status
2. Interface Type
3. Line Type
>
4. Idle Code
…
5. Rx Sensitivity
6. User Name
7. Alarms
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
(Up)
(Balance)
(Unframed)
(7c)
(Short Haul)
(E1-1)
(Unmasked)
1M/ 1C
Figure 7-13. E1 Configuration Screen
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring the Local ASMi-54L
7-9
Chapter 7 Application Tutorial
Installation and Operation Manual
Configuring the SHDSL Line

To configure the SHDSL line:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Line.
The SHDSL Line Configuration screen appears. Set the parameters as
prompted in the screen.
2. Press <S> to save the changes.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Line
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Line
(1)
Administrative Status
Wire Mode
TC Layer
STU
Power Backoff[0-31]
Transmission Mode
Line Probe
Payload Rate
Clock Mode
Loop Attenuation Threshold (dB)[0…127]
SNR Margin Threshold (dB)[0…15]
Alarms
Repeaters
(Up)
(2 W)
(64-65 octet)
(Remote)
(0)
(ANNEX A/F) (Central only)
(Disable) (Central only)
(192kbps) (Central only)
(Plesiochronous_1) (E1 only)
(0)
(0)
(Unmasked)
(HDLC only)
>
…
…
…
…
>
…
…
…
>
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 7-14. SHDSL Line Configuration Screen
Note
Only the first line can be configured to TC=HDLC. When this is done, other lines
will not be visible.
Note
In EFM mode, Transmission Mode and Line Probe will be updated simultaneously
on all lines.
Configuring the Application
The application configuration procedure has three main stages:
7-10
•
Defining the bridge.
•
Defining VLANS and adding them the relevant bridge ports.
•
Configuring the SHDSL physical layer (see Configuring the SHDSL Line).
Configuring the Local ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 7 Application Tutorial
Configuring the Internal Bridge
The internal bridge connects the unit ports. Configure the bridge to properly
process the VLAN tags to maintain priority of the data flows.
The bridge operates in transparent mode (learning is disabled) or filtered mode
(learning and filtering are enabled).

To define the bridge:
1. Open the Bridge menu (Main>Configuration>Application>Bridge).
2. Define the bridge parameters. See Configuring the Internal Bridge in
Chapter 4 for more information on each of the parameters.
3. Press <S> to save the changes.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>Bridge
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
VLAN Mode
Forwarding Mode
Aging time (sec) [60 – 4080]
Static MAC table
Bridge port
VLAN membership
… (Aware)
… (Filter)
… (300)
[] >
>
>
>
S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 7-15. Bridge Screen – Setting Bridge Port Parameters
Configuring VLANs
Define the required VLAN and add to it the relevant bridge ports.

To configure a VLAN:
1. In the Bridge menu, select VLAN members to open the VLAN membership
configuration menu.
2. Change the VLAN mode to VLAN Aware.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring the Local ASMi-54L
7-11
Chapter 7 Application Tutorial
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>Bridge
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
VLAN Mode
Forwarding Mode
Aging time (sec) [60 – 4080]
Static MAC table
Bridge port
VLAN membership
… (Aware)
… (Filter)
… (300)
[] >
>
>
>
S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 7-16. Bridge Screen –Setting VLAN Parameters
3. To define and create a new VLAN, see Configuring VLAN Membership in
Chapter 4 for more information.
4. Add the relevant ports to the defined VLAN (including the Host bridge port if
it is the VLAN used for management). Press <S> to save the VLAN
Membership configuration.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>Bridge>VLAN Membership
1.
2.
3.
4.
VLAN ID [1-4094]
Egress Tagged Ports
Egress Untagged Ports
Egress Unmodified Ports
(1)
> (1,2)
> (3,4)
> 5
F – Forwards; B – Backwards; R - Remove; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 7-17. VLAN Membership Screen
Note
A maximum of 64 VLANs can be defined due to hardware limitations.
Defining Bridge Ports
The unit is supplied with the Bridge Ports preconfigured for basic use; they do
not need to be reconfigured. The factory-set configuration is shown in
Table 4-10. To reconfigure the ports, the configuration for each port must first
be deleted. See Configuring the Bridge Ports in Chapter 4 for more details.
Table 7-1. Factory Set Bridge Port Settings
7-12
Bridge Port
Configured to
1
Reserved for management host; appears after
providing the host with the IP address.
2
Fast Ethernet Port 1
3
Fast Ethernet Port 2
Configuring the Local ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 7 Application Tutorial
Bridge Port
Configured to
4
Fast Ethernet Port 3
5
Fast Ethernet Port 4
6
PCS Port 1
Configuring the Fault Propagation
The Fault Propagation screen is used for configuring fault propagation options.
When the Network>User Fault Propagation feature is enabled, the LAN ports are
deactivated when the PCS uplink goes down. They will come up again once the
PCS port is resynchronized.

To configure the fault propagation:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Configuration>System>Fault Propagation.
The Fault Propagation screen appears.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>System>Fault Propagation
1. Network -> User Fault Propagation
2. User -> Network Fault Propagation
> (Interface Deactivation)
> (Disable)
>
A – Add; R – Remove; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 7-18. Fault Propagation Screen
2. Select Network > User Fault Propagation and set it to Interface Deactivation.
3. Press <S> to save the changes.
Configuring Quality of Service (QoS)
Four methods of traffic classification are supported:
•
802.1 priority mapping
•
DSCP priority mapping, using tag values
•
Priority mapping per bridge port
•
Priority mapping per VLAN ID.
The classification method is chosen using the Priority Classification menu (Main
Menu>Applications>QoS).
Four traffic queues can be assigned priorities using the Priority Mapping menu.
These are priority queues. Class 0 (default) has the lowest priority and Class 3
has the highest priority. Two modes of operation are supported according to
Scheduling Mode: SP (Strict Priority) or WFQ (Weighted Fair).
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring the Local ASMi-54L
7-13
Chapter 7 Application Tutorial

Installation and Operation Manual
To configure the user traffic priority:
1. From the Main menu select Configuration>Qos.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>QoS
1. Priority Classification
2. Priority Mapping
3. Scheduling Mode
> (802.1p)
>
(SP)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 7-19. Qos Screen
2. Verify that the Priority Classification is set to 802.1p.
3. Select Priority Mapping.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>QoS>Priority Mapping
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
User
User
User
User
User
User
User
User
Priority
Priority
Priority
Priority
Priority
Priority
Priority
Priority
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class
0)
0)
0)
0)
0)
0)
0)
0)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 7-20. Priority Mapping Screen
4. Select User Priority 7.
ASMi-54L
>Applications>QoS>Priority Mapping>User Priority 7 (Traffic
Class 0)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Traffic
Traffic
Traffic
Traffic
Class
Class
Class
Class
0
1
2
3
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 7-21. User Priority Screen
7-14
Configuring the Local ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 7 Application Tutorial
5. Select Traffic Class 2.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>QoS>Priority Mapping ( 802.1p )
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
User
User
User
User
User
User
User
User
Priority
Priority
Priority
Priority
Priority
Priority
Priority
Priority
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class
>
S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
0)
0)
0)
0)
0)
0)
0)
2)
1M/ 1C
Figure 7-22. Priority Mapping (802.1p) Screen
6. Press <S> to save the changes.
Configuring Link OAM
Ethernet Link OAM Configuration screen is used for configuring OAM options.
The Link OAM Descriptors submenu allows you to display and set the 802.3ah
OAM link configuration Descriptors, while the Link OAM Parameters submenu lets
you display and set the 802.3ah OAM link configuration Parameters not covered
by Descriptors.
Configuring Link OAM Descriptors

To configure link OAM Descriptors:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Configuration>Applications>Link OAM>Link OAM
Descriptors.
The Link OAM Descriptor Configuration screen appears.
2. Select Link OAM Mode and set it to Passive.
3. Select Link OAM Loopback Rx and set it to Process.
4. Select Link OAM Mode again and set it to Active.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring the Local ASMi-54L
7-15
Chapter 7 Application Tutorial
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Applications>Link OAM>Link OAM Descriptors
1.
2.
3.
4.
Descriptor Number
OAM Mode
OAM Loopback Rx
OAM Rate Limit [1 – 100]
…
>
>
…
(1)
(Passive)
(Process)
(10)
>
Please select item <1 to 4)
R-Remove
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 7-23. Link OAM Descriptor Configuration Screen
Configuring Link OAM Parameters

To configure link OAM Parameters:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Link OAM>Link
OAM Parameters.
The Link OAM Parameter Configuration screen appears.
2. Select Link OAM Status and set it to Enabled.
ASMi-54L
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL>Link OAM>Link OAM Parameters
SHDSL Port
OAM Status
1. Descriptor Number
> (1)
> (Enabled)
> (1)
>
F – Forward
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1M/ 1C
Figure 7-24. Link OAM Descriptor Configuration Screen
Saving the Configuration File
Configuration files can be uploaded for storage and backup. You must save the
file containing all configured parameters of the ASMi-54L to a PC.
Management software allows file transfer via TFTP only.

To save the configuration file:
1. Activate the TFTP server on your PC. For more information on setting up a
TFTP server, see Chapter 4.
2. From the Main Menu>Utilities>File Transfer>TFTP, set the following (for
example):
7-16

Server IP Address – 172.17.152.46

Remote File Name – Remote_ASMi_54L.cfg.
Configuring the Local ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 7 Application Tutorial
3. Press <S> to save the changes.
4. Select Utilities>File Transfer>TFTP>Command>Cfg Upload to start uploading
the configuration file to a remote server.
ASMi-54L starts the file transfer.
ASMi-54L
Utilities>File Transfer>TFTP
1.
2.
3.
4.
Transfer Status
Transfer Error
Command
Remote File Name
Server IP
TFTP Total Timeout (ms)[60-240]
(no0p)
(NoError)
>
…
…
…
(Put your string here)
(0.0.0.0)
(60)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 7-25. TFTP File Transfer Screen
The TFTP file transfer process is logged with the following system messages (see
Chapter 6):
•
TFTP – Starting Upload
•
TFTP – Upload Failed
7.4

Configuring the Remote ASMi-54L
To configure the remote ASMi-54L:
1. Access the remote device.
2. Configure its host IP address.
3. Verify the IP connection by pinging the remote PC and remote ASMi-54L from
the local PC.
4. Activate the TFTP server on the local PC.
5. Access the remote ASMi-54L.
6. Navigate to Utilities>File utilities>S/W & File Transfer Using TFTP
7. Download the configuration file to the remote unit by setting the following
parameters:

File name – Remote_ASMi 54L.cfg

Command –DwnLoad

Server IP – 172.17.152.47.
8. Save the changes to start the download.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring the Remote ASMi-54L
7-17
Chapter 7 Application Tutorial
7.5
Installation and Operation Manual
Testing the Application
You will now test the configuration. This includes verifying proper data transfer
and performing diagnostics tests.
Verifying Proper Data Transfer

To verify proper data transfer between the PCs:
1. From the local PC, open the Run prompt and enter: ping 172.17.152.47 -t.
2. Verify that the remote PC responds to the ping.
3. From the remote PC, open the Run prompt and enter: ping 172.17.152.46-t.
4. Verify that the local PC responds to the ping.

To verify that the fault propagation is operating:
1. Keep the main link of the local ASMi-54L disconnected.
2. Access the local ASMi-54L and go to Monitoring>Physical Layers>Ethernet
Status.
3. Press <F> to display the Fast Ethernet Port 1 status.
4. Verify that the Operational Status is set to Up.
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical Layers>Ethernet>Status
Port
(1)
Administrative Status
Operation Status
Speed & Duplex
Flow Control
(Enable)
(Up)
(100base – T Full Duplex)
(Enable)
>
F – Forward; B - Backward
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/1 C
Figure 7-26. Ethernet Port Operational Status - Up
5. Disconnect the redundant link of the local ASMi-54L.
6. Verify that the local PC is receiving Destination Host Unreachable messages
when the ping is run, indicating that the User Ethernet and Uplink ports are
down.
7. Return to the local ASMi-54L, and press <Enter> several times to verify that
the Operational Status changed to Down.
7-18
Testing the Application
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 7 Application Tutorial
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>Physical Layers>Ethernet>Status
Port
(3)
Administrative Status
Operation Status
Speed & Duplex
Flow Control
(Enable)
(Down)
(100base – T Full Duplex)
(Enable)
>
F – Forward; B - Backward
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/1 C
Figure 7-27. Ethernet Port Operational Status - Down
8. Reconnect both network ports of the local ASMi-54L.
Verify that the Operational Status of Port 3 returned to Up. Within
10 seconds you should also receive a reply from the ping command.
Running Diagnostic Tests
Running E1 Loopback Tests
ASMi-54L checks network integrity of E1 line by running local and remote tests.
To diagnose E1 line problems, ASMi-54L supports the local and remote loopbacks
initiated from the supervisory terminal. All loopbacks start in the immediate
vicinity of the link and then proceed to the inner part of the unit.
Running Local Loopback Tests
The local loopback test (LLB) checks the performance and data connectivity of
the local ASMi-54L E1 link, the network site, and the connection between them.
Note

After the loop timeout, the screen can be refreshed by pressing <R>.
To run the local loopback test:
1. Access the local ASMi-54L.
2. Select Main Menu>Diagnostics>E1.
3. From the E1 Diagnostics screen, select Time out and set it to 1000 seconds.
4. Select Loop.
The Loop screen appears (see Figure 7-28).
5. From the Loop Tests menu, select Local.
6. Set the Loopback Timeout as needed.
7. Press <S> (Save) to activate the LLB.
The LLB is initiated.
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Testing the Application
7-19
Chapter 7 Application Tutorial
Installation and Operation Manual
ASMi-54L
Diagnostics>E1>Loop
1. Disable
2. Local
3. Remote
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 7-28. Loop Screen
8. After finishing the test, select Test Type>Disable to disable the loopback.
9. Press <S> to save the changes.
Running Remote Loopback Tests
The remote loopback test (RLB) checks the performance and data connectivity of
the local and remote ASMi-54L SHDSL link.
Note

After the loop timeout, the screen can be refreshed by pressing <R>.
To run the remote loopback test:
1. Access the local ASMi-54L.
2. Select Diagnostics>E1.
3. From the E1 Diagnostics screen, select Time out and set it to 1000 seconds.
4.
Select Loop.
The Loop screen appears (see Figure 7-29).
5. From the Loop Tests menu, select Remote.
6. Press <Esc> to return to the previous screen and set the Loopback Timeout
to 1000 seconds.
7. Press <S> (Save) to activate the RLB.
The RLB is initiated.
ASMi-54L
Diagnostics>E1>Loop
1. Disable
2. Local
3. Remote
>
‘r’ - Refresh
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 7-29. Loop Screen
7-20
Testing the Application
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 7 Application Tutorial
8. After finishing the tests, select Test Type>Disable to disable the loopback.
9. Press <S> to save the changes.
Running Repeater Loopback Tests
To diagnose repeater problems, ASMi-54L supports the local and remote
loopbacks initiated from the supervisory terminal. All loopbacks start in the
immediate vicinity of the link and then proceed to the inner part of the unit.
The local loopback test checks the performance and data connectivity of the
selected local ASMi-54L repeater and the connection between ASMi-54L and local
network user equipment.

To activate a network loopback:
1. Select Diagnostics>Repeaters.
The Repeater Diagnostics screen appears.
2. From the Repeater Diagnostics screen, select Time out to set the loopback
timeout (in seconds).
The Timeout value is changed.
Note
Loop timeout = 0 sets endless test.
3. Select Network Loop and change Disable to Enable
The Network Loop screen appears.
4. Press <S> (Save) to activate the local loopback.
The local loopback is initiated.
After finishing the test, select Test Type>Disable to disable the loopback.
7.6
Collecting Performance Statistics
This section describes performance statistics on the system and physical levels
collected by various ASMi-54L counters.
Physical Layer Statistics
Physical layer statistics are not covered in this section. For more information, see
Chapter 5.
The status information is available via the Monitoring menu.
Event Reporting
ASMi-54L maintains a log file that can hold up to 1,000 system messages. All
events are time-stamped.
The events are layered hierarchically.
The Event Log file contents can be viewed via an ASCII control terminal or a
Network Management Station (NMS).
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Collecting Performance Statistics
7-21
Chapter 7 Application Tutorial
Installation and Operation Manual
The contents can be cleared at any time.
ASMi-54L has an integrated SNTP client. The SNTP client is used as a means for
receiving the date and time from the network. When the SNTP server is properly
configured and accessible, the device displays the actual date and time as was
received from the SNTP server, instead of the system uptime, which is the default
state.
When the actual date and time are not available, the log file messages are
recorded with the date 00-00-0000 and system uptime. Once the SNTP server
becomes available, all messages (including those already received) appear with
the actual date and time.

To view the Event Log file via NMS:
•

Select Main Menu>Monitoring>System>Event Log.
To clear the Event Log file:
1. Select Main Menu>Monitoring>System>Event Log and press <C> (Clear).
The following screen appears:
Are you sure (Y/N)?
2. Press <Y> to clear or <N> to return to the Event Log screen.
ASMi-54L
Monitoring>System>Event Log
1
2
3
4
5
6
Source
SHDSL Port 2
SHDSL Port 1
Eth Port 4
Eth Port 3
Eth Port 2
Eth Port 1
Description
SHDSL SYNC LOSS
SHDSL SYNC LOSS
LAN NOT CONNECTED
LAN NOT CONNECTED
LAN NOT CONNECTED
LAN NOT CONNECTED
>
c-Clear Table; r-Refresh Table
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Current Time: 0:22:46
Status
Major
Major
Major
Major
Major
Major
Date
1970-01-01
1970-01-01
1970-01-01
1970-01-01
1970-01-01
1970-01-01
Time
00:00:01
00:00:02
00:00:04
00:00:04
00:00:04
00:00:04
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 7-30. Typical Event Log File Accessed via the Network Management Station
7-22
Collecting Performance Statistics
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ASMi-54L
Appendix A
Connection Data
A.1
Ethernet Connector
The 10/100BaseT Ethernet electrical interface is an 8-pin RJ-45 connector, wired
in accordance with Table A-1.
Table A-1. 10/100BaseT Ethernet Connector Pinouts
Pin
Function
1
Rx+
2
Rx–
3
Tx+
4, 5
–
6
Tx–
7, 8
–
Tx+/Tx- and Rx+/Rx- may be automatically crossed if MDI-X is enabled.
A.2
SHDSL Connector
The SHDSL electrical interface is an 8-pin RJ-45 connector, wired in accordance
with Table A-2.
Table A-2. SHDSL Connector Pinouts
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Pin
Function
1
NC
2
NC
3
Loop 2
4
Loop 1
5
Loop 1
6
Loop 2
7
NC
8
NC
SHDSL Connector
A-1
Appendix A Connection Data
Note
Installation and Operation Manual
Do not connect wires to the NC pins.
Loop 1 refers to line 1 and Loop 2 refers to line 2.
Note
For 2W option, only Loop 1 pins are in use.
A.3
E1 Interface Connector
The balanced E1 interface terminates in RJ-45 connector. Table A-3 lists the
balanced connector pin assignment.
Table A-3. E1 Connector Pinout
Pin
Function
1, 2
Transmit (output)
4, 5
Receive (input)
7
CPU ID for unbalanced interface detection
8
Earth GND
Note
It is recommended to use 4-wire cables (pin numbers 1, 2, 4, and 5) only for E1
connections. If 8-wire cable is used, verify that pin #7 is not connected on the
equipment side.
For unbalanced E1, use the adaptor cable CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1.
A.4
Control Connector
The control terminal interface terminates in a V.24/RS-232 9-pin D-type female
DCE connector. Table A-4 lists the control connector pin assignments.
Table A-4. CONTROL Connector Pinout
A-2
Control Connector
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Pin
Function
Direction
2
Rxd (RD)
OUT
3
Txd (TD)
IN
5
Ground (GND)
ASMi-54L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Publication No. 503-210-11/15
Order this publication by Catalog No. 803892
International Headquarters
24 Raoul Wallenberg Street
Tel Aviv 69719, Israel
Tel. 972-3-6458181
Fax 972-3-6498250, 6474436
E-mail market@rad.com
North America Headquarters
900 Corporate Drive
Mahwah, NJ 07430, USA
Tel. 201-5291100
Toll free 1-800-4447234
Fax 201-5295777
E-mail market@radusa.com
www.rad.com
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine